Tg8614a P342, P343 PDF

Technical Guide Types MiCOM P342, P343 Generator Protection Relays
Technical Guide Types MiCOM P342, P343 Generator Protection Relays Volume 1
TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS
TG8614A Volume 1 Contents
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT SAFETY SECTION CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION NOTES Includes Publication R6614, P340 Series Generator Protection Relays CHAPTER 3. RELAY DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 4. TECHNICAL DATA CHAPTER 5. SCADA COMMUNICATIONS APPENDIX A. COURIER DATA BASE APPENDIX B. WIRING DIAGRAMS
Technical Guide Type MiCOM 342, 343 Generator Protection Relays
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits of ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd products are immune to the relevant levels of electrostatic discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured. 1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. 2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors. 3. Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential. 4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. 5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag. More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-0F. If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10M ohms. If a wrist strap is not available, you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent the build up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible. ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F.
SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the equipment.
Health and safety The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section. Explanation of symbols and labels The meaning of symbols and labels which may be used on the equipment or in the product documentation, is given below.
Caution: refer to product documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal
Functional *earth terminal. Note: this symbol may also be used for a protective/ safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly eg. power supply.
*Note: The term earth used throughout the product documentation is the direct equivalent of the North American term ground.
Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard. The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5 mm2, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation. Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating and polarity; CT circuit rating and integrity of connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of earth connection (where applicable) Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. External resistors Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the equipment. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage. Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
Decommissioning and Disposal

Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning. It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any products containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation,may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
Disposal:
Technical Specifications
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment is 16A, Red Spot type or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation. Insulation class: IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 This equipment requires a Class I protective (safety) earth EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 connection to ensure user Class I safety. Installation Category (Overvoltage): IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 Distribution level, fixed Category III installation. Equipment in EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 this category is qualification Category III tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 500, 0.5J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits. IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 Compliance is demonstrated by Pollution degree 2 reference to generic safety EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 standards. Pollution degree 2 Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive.
Environment:
Product safety: 73/23/EEC
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 Compliance is demonstrated EN 60950: 1992/A11:1997 by reference to generic safety standards.
Chapter 1 Introduction
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Contents Page 1 of 1 1 2 4 4 4 5 6 8 9 9 9 9 10 11 12 12 12 13 13 14 16 16 18 20 4 6 8 11 14 15 17
1. 2. 3 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.7 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE Introduction to the relay Front panel Relay rear panel Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options Menu structure Protection settings Disturbance recorder settings Control and support settings Password protection Relay confirguration Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) Default display and menu time-out Menu navigation and setting browsing Password entry Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records Settings changes Front communication port user interface Rear communication port user interface Courier communication Modbus communication IEC60807-5 CS 103 communication Relay front view Relay rear view Menu structure Front panel user interface Front port connection PC - relay signal connection Remote communication connection arrangements
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 1 of 21
Section 1.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from ALSTOM. Central to the MiCOM concept is fexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system. The components within MiCOM are: P range protection relays; C range control products; M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring; S range versatile PC support and substation control packages. MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, refer to the technical publication which can be obtained from: ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd, or your local sales office. Alternatively visit our web site.
Section 2.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES
The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and application. Divided into two volumes, as follows: Volume 1 Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the power system. Volume 2 Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning and maintenance of the relay. The chapter content within each volume is summarised below. Volume 1 Technical Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Section Chapter 1 Introduction A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using the relay. Chapter 2 Application notes (includes a copy of publication RXXXX) Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both the protection elements and the relays other functions such as event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay. Chapter 3 Relay description Overview of the operation of the relays hardware and software. This chapter includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay. Chapter 4 Technical data Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical standards is quoted where appropriate. Chapter 5 Communications and interface guide This chapter provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of the relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database stored within the relay. The chapter also gives information on each of the communication protocols that can be used with the relay, and is intended to allow the user to design a custom interface to a SCADA system.
Appendix A Relay menu database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC60870-5-103 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. Appendix B External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to the relay. Volume 2 Operation Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Section Chapter 1 Introduction A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using the relay. Chapter 2 Installation (includes a copy of publication RXXXX) Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided incorporating earthing recommendations. Chapter 3 Commissioning and maintenance Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined. Chapter 4 Problem analysis. Advice on how to recognise failure modes and the recommended course of action. Appendix A Relay menu database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC60870-5-103 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. Appendix B External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to the relay. Repair Form
Section 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get started using the relay. 3.1 3.1.1 Introduction to the relay Front panel The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
Serial No and I*,V Ratings Top cover
SER No DIAG No
Zn Vx Vn
1/5 A 50/60 Hz
V V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed function LEDs
ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER
User programmable function LEDs
Keypad
SK1 SK2
Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port
Figure 1: Relay front view
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1: a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (, , and ), an enter key (), a clear key (C), and a read key (&). 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8 programmable function LEDs on the right hand side. Under the top hinged cover: the relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information*. Under the bottom hinged cover: battery compartment to hold the AA size battery which is used for memory back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records. a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) via an RS232 serial data connection. a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data connection. The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to be self-resetting)*. Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared. Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays protection is unavailable. Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at all times. It will be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that there is an error with the relays hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay. 3.1.2 Relay rear panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals*, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear RS485 communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear communication port which are both optional. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear RS485/K Bus communication port, in addition to the optional IRIG-B time synchronising input and optical fibre communication port.
Optional IRIG-B board
Digital input connections
Power supply connection

IRIG B
PORT 1
TX
RX
Rear comms port (RS485)
Current* and voltage input terminals
Digital output (relays) connections
Figure 2: Relay rear view

Refer to the wiring diagram in appendix 2 for complete connection details. 3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options The relay has three user interfaces: the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad. the front port which supports Courier communication. the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when the relay is ordered. The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the three interfaces are summarised in Table 1.
Keypad/LCD Display & modification of all settings Digital I/O signal status Display/extraction of measurements Display/extraction of fault records Display/extraction of event & alarm records Extraction of disturbance records Programmable scheme logic settings Reset of fault & alarm records Clear event & fault records Time synchronisation Control commands
Courier
Modbus
IEC60870
Table 1
3.3
Menu structure The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column contains the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in Appendix A of the manual.
Column header Up to 4 protection setting groups
System data
View records
Overcurrent
Earth fault
Column data settings
Control & support
Group 1 Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4
Figure 3: Menu structure

All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings, disturbance recorder settings, or control and support, (C&S) settings. One of two different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary scratchpad. It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security, and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection settings will all take effect at the same time.
3.3.1
Protection settings The protection settings include the following items: protection element settings scheme logic settings auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)* fault locator settings (where appropriate)* There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is used by the protection elements.
3.3.2
Disturbance recorder settings The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position, selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger the recording.
3.3.3
Control & support settings The control & support settings include: relay configuration settings open/close circuit breaker* CT & VT ratio settings* reset LEDs active protection setting group password & language settings circuit breaker control & monitoring settings* communications settings measurement settings event & fault record settings user interface settings commissioning settings
3.4
Password protection The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled determines which of the relays settings can be changed and is controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised in Table 2.
Access Level Level 0 No password required Level 1 Password 1 or 2 required
Operations Enabled Read access to all settings, alarms, event records and fault records. As level 0 plus: Control commands, e.g. circuit breaker open/close. Reset of fault and alarm conditions. Reset LEDs. Clearing of event and fault records. As level 1 plus: All other settings.
Level 2 Password 2 required
Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a setting change is attempted, or by moving to the Password cell in the System data column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface, that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact ALSTOM with the relays serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column, the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of the default display options. The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default menu access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the Password control cell which is found in the System data column of the menu (note that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled). 3.5 Relay configuration The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection, control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay, there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the Configuration column from Enabled to Disabled. The configuration column controls which of the 4 protection settings groups is selected as active through the Active settings cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to be copied to another group.
To do this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group to be copied, then set the Copy to cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by the relay following confirmation. To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the Restore defaults cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set the Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the default values to all of the relays settings, not just the protection groups settings. The default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station. 3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay, with the information displayed on the LCD. The , , and keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the rate of change or movement becomes.
System frequency
Other default displays
3-phase voltage Alarm messages
Date and time
C C
Column 1 Sytem data
Column 2 View records
Other column headings
Column n Group 4 Overcurrent
Data 1.1 Language
Data 2.1 Last record
C
Note: The C key will return to column header from any menu cell
Data n.1 |>1 function
Data 1.2 Password
Data 2.2 Time and date
Data n.2 |>1 directional
Other setting cells in column 1 Data 1.n Password level 2
Other setting cells in column 2 Data 2.n C A voltage
Other setting cells in column n
Data n.n |>char angle
Figure 4: Front panel user interface

3.6.1
Default display and menu time-out The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained. The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options: 3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from the default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the and keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by: Alarms/Faults present Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults present message.
3.6.2
Menu navigation and setting browsing The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the key will display the first column heading. To select the required column heading use the and keys. The setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the and keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the [up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key C. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the default display press the [up arrow symbol] key or the clear key C from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the key, as the auto-repeat will stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the key must be released and pressed again.
3.6.3
Password entry When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear: Enter Password **** Level 1 Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed. Press the and keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move between the character fields of the password, use the and keys. The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key . The display will revert to Enter Password if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and
if so what level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key C. Alternatively, the password can be entered using the Password cell of the System data column. For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the Password menu cell in the System data column and pressing the clear key C instead of entering a password. 3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the read key &. When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of this use the & key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear: Press clear to reset alarms To clear all alarm messages press C; to return to the alarms/faults present display and leave the alarms uncleared, press &.. Depending on the password configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip. Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has been entered using the & key, the C key can be pressed, this will move the display straight to the fault record. Pressing C again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt where pressing C once more will clear all alarms. 3.6.5 Setting changes To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell. To change the cell value press the enter key , which will bring up a flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be selected using the and keys. When the desired new value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing . Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button C is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs.
For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to the default display the following prompt will be given: Upate settings? Enter or Clear Pressing will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing C will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they are entered, without Update settings? prompt. 3.7 Front communication port user interface The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in Figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control to allow communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows NT based software package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK2 SK1
25 pin download/monitor port
Battery
9 pin front comms port Serial data connector (up to 15m)
Serial communication port (COM 1 or COM 2)
Figure 5: Front port connection

The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 Tx Transmit data Rx Receive data 0V Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25 Way Pin no. 3 Pin no. 2 Pin no. 7 9 Way 2 3 5 Rx Receive data Tx Transmit data 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay.
MiCOM relay PC
DCE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V
Serial data connector
DTE Pin 2 Rx Pin 3 Tx Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
Figure 6: PC-relay signal connection

Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below: Protocol Baud rate Courier address Message format Courier 19,200 bits/s 1 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has been enabled will be revoked.
3.8
Rear communication port user interface The rear port can support one of three communication protocols (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. See appendix 2 for details of the connection terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/RS485 serial data communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus and IEC60870-5-103 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity. The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the Communications column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. The first cell down the column shows the communication protocol being used by the rear port.
3.8.1
Courier communication Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit. The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T, ACCESS or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/95 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting changes with the relay. To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from ALSTOM Protection & Control Ltd. A typical connection arrangement is shown in Figure 7. For more detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length and have up to 32 relays connected to it.
Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
RS232 PC
K-Bus
PC serial port
KITZ protocol converter
Modem
Public switched telephone network
Courier master station eg. substation control room
PC
Modem
Remote Courier master station eg. area control centre
Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements

Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Only two settings apply to the rear port using Courier, the relays address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol Courier The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay: Remote address 1 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the Save changes cell of the Configuration column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this action for the setting changes to take effect. 3.8.2 Modbus communication Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol Modbus The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay: Modbus address 23 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1 and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None
The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. 3.8.3 IEC60870-5 CS 103 communication The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-51 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC60870-5-103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol. To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC60870-5-103 which are described below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol IEC60870-5-103 The next cell down controls the IEC60870-5-103 address of the relay: Remote address 162 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same IEC60870-5-103 address. The IEC60870-5103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600bits/s IEC60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
The next cell down controls the period between IEC60870-5-103 measurements: Measuret period 30.00 s The IEC60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set between 1 and 60 seconds. The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the communication: Physical link RS485 The default setting is to select the electrical RS485 connection. If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to Fibre optic. The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this interface, where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the IEC60870-5-103 protocol*. Function type 226
Technical Guide MiCOM P342, P343 Generator Protection Relays
Chapter 2 Applications Notes
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Contents 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 16 17 18 19 21 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 36 36 38 39 40 40 40 42 44 45 46 46 48 48 48 48 50 51 53
1. 1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.1.1 2.5.1.2 2.5.1.3 2.5.1.4 2.5.2 2.5.2.1 2.6 2.6.1 2.7 2.7.1 2.8 2.8.1 2.9 2.9.1 2.10 2.10.1 2.10.1.1 2.10.1.2 2.10.1.3 2.11 2.11.1 2.12 2.12.1 2.12.1.1 2.12.2 2.12.2.1 2.12.3 2.12.3.1 2.13 2.13.1 2.14 2.14.1
INTRODUCTION Protection of generators MiCOM Generator protection relays Protection features Non-protection features APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Configuration column CT and VT ratios Generator differential protection Biased differential protection Setting guidelines for biased differential protection High impedance differential protection Setting guidelines for high impedance differential protection Phase fault overcurrent protection Application of timer hold facility Setting guidelines for overcurrent protection System back-up protection Voltage dependant overcurrent protection Voltage controlled overcurrent protection Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent function Voltage restrained overcurrent protection Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent functions Under impedance protection Setting guidelines for under impedance function Undervoltage protection function (27) Setting guidelines for undervoltage protection Overvoltage protection Setting guidelines for overvoltage protection Underfrequency protection Setting guidelines for underfrequency protection Overfrequency protection function Setting guidelines for overfrequency protection Field failure protection function (40) Setting guidelines for field failure protection Impedance element 1 Impedance element 2 Power factor element Negative phase sequence thermal protection Setting guidelines for negative phase sequency thermal protection Reverse power/over power/low forward power Low forward power protection function Low forward power setting guideline Reverse power protection function Reverse power setting guideline Over power protection Over power setting guideline Stator earth fault protection function Setting guideline for stator earth fault protection Residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection function Setting guidelines for residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Contents 54 56 57 58 61 61 63 66 68 68 70 70 71 72 73 74 74 75 75 77 77 77 79 79 80 80 81 83 83 84 84 84 85 86 86 87 87 88 89 89 91 91 91 92 92 92 92 93 93 93 94
2.15 2.15.1 2.16 2.16.1 2.16.1.1 2.16.2 2.16.2.1 2.17 2.17.1 2.18 2.18.1 2.19 2.19.1 2.20 2.20.1 2.21 2.21.1 2.21.2 2.21.3 2.22 2.22.1 2.22.2 2.22.3 2.22.3.1 2.22.4 2.23 2.24 3. 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.4.1 3.2.4.2 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.2.10 3.2.11 3.2.12 3.2.13 3.2.14 3.2.15 3.3
Sensitive earth fault protection function Setting guidelines for sensitive earth fault protection Restricted earth fault protection Low impedance biased differential REF protection Setting guidelines for low impedance biased REF protection High impedance restricted earth fault protection Setting guidelines for high impedance REF protection 100% stator earth fault protection Setting guidelines for 100% stator earth fault protection overfluxing protection Setting guidelines for overfluxing protection Dead machine/unintentional energisation at standstill protection Setting guidelines for dead machine protection Resistive temperature device (RTD) thermal protection Setting guidelines for RTD thermal protection Pole slipping protection Reverse power protection System back-up protection function Field failure protection function Circuit breaker failure protection Breaker failure protection configurations Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers Typical settings Breaker fail timer settings Breaker fail undercurrent settings Breaker flashover protection Blocked overcurrent protection APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS VT supervision Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation Menu settings CT supervision The CT supervision feature Setting the CT supervision element Circuit breaker state monitoring Circuit breaker condition monitoring Circuit breaker condition monitoring features Circuit breaker state monitoring features Event and fault records Change of state of opto-isolated inputs Change of state of one or more output relay contacts Relay alarm conditions Protection element starts and trips General events Fault records Maintenance reports Setting changes Resetting of event/fault records Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software Disturbance recorder
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Contents 95 96 96 96 97 97 97 97 97 97 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 99 99 99 99 99 100 100 100 101 101 101 102
3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.5.1 3.4.5.2 3.4.5.3 3.4.6 3.4.6.1 3.4.6.2 3.4.6.3 3.4.6.4 3.4.6.5 3.4.6.6 3.4.6.7 3.4.6.8 3.4.6.9 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.6
Measurements Measured voltages and currents Sequence voltages and currents Power and energy quantities RMS voltages and currents Demand values Fixed demand values Rolling demand values Peak demand values Settings Default display Local values Remote values Measurement REF Measurement mode Fixed demand period Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods Distance Fault location CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS Generator differential function Biased differential protection High impedance differential protection Voltage dependent overcurrent, field failure and negative phase sequence protection functions Sensitive directional earth fault protection function residual current input Line current transformers Core balanced current transformers Stator earth fault protection function and sensitive directional earth fault current polarising input Reverse and low forward power protection functions Protection class current transformers Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to a kneepoint voltage
Section 1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Protection of generators An AC generator forms the electromechanical stage of an overall energy conversion process that results in the production of electrical power. A reciprocating engine, or one of many forms of turbine, acts as a prime mover to provide the rotary mechanical input to the alternator. There are many forms of generating plant that utilise a variety of sources of energy available, eg. combustion of fossil fuels, hydro dams and nuclear fission. Generation schemes may be provided for base-load production, peaklopping or for providing standby power. Electrical protection should quickly detect and initiate shutdown for major electrical faults associated with the generating plant and, less urgently, to detect abnormal operating conditions which may lead to plant damage. Abnormal electrical conditions can arise as a result of a failure within the generating plant itself, but can also be externally imposed on the generator. Common categories of faults and abnormal conditions which can be detected electrically are listed as follows: (Not all conditions have to be detected for all applications.) Major electrical faults
Insulation failure of stator windings or connections

Secondary electrical faults
Insulation failure of excitation system Failure of excitation system Unsynchronised over voltage
Abnormal prime mover or control conditions
Failure of prime mover Over frequency Over fluxing Dead machine energisation Breaker flashover
System related
Feeding an uncleared fault Prolonged or heavy unbalanced loading Prolonged or heavy overload Loss of synchronism Over frequency Under frequency Synchronised over voltage Over fluxing Undervoltage
In addition various types of mechanical protection may be necessary, such as vibration detection, lubricant and coolant monitoring, temperature detection etc. The action required following response of an electrical or mechanical protection is often categorised as follows:
Urgent shutdown Non-urgent shutdown Alarm only

An urgent shutdown would be required, for example, if a phase to phase fault occurred within the generator electrical connections. A non-urgent shutdown might be sequential, where the prime mover may be shutdown prior to electrically unloading the generator, in order to avoid over speed. A non-urgent shutdown may be initiated in the case of continued unbalanced loading. In this case, it is desirable that an alarm should be given before shutdown becomes necessary, in order to allow for operator intervention to remedy the situation. For urgent tripping, it may be desirable to electrically maintain the shutdown condition with latching protection output contacts, which would require manual resetting. For a non-urgent shutdown, it may be required that the output contacts are self-reset, so that production of power can be re-started as soon as possible. 1.2 MiCOM Generator protection relays MiCOM relays are a new range of products from ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd. Using the latest numerical technology the platform includes devices designed for the application to a wide range of power system plant such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables. Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such product in the range is the P340 Generator protection relays. The relays have been designed to cater for the protection of a wide range of generators from small machines, providing standby power on industrial sites, to large machines in power stations providing for the base load on the grid transmission network. The relays also include a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be accessed remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options. 1.2.1 Protection features The P340 relays contain a wide variety of protection functions for the protection of generators. There are 2 separate models available to cover a wide range of applications. The protection features of each model are summarised below:
Generator differential protection - Phase segregated differential protection Phase fault overcurrent protection - Two stage non-directional back-up
protection.
operating on a biased or high impedance principle. Provides high speed, discriminative protection for all fault types. {P343 only}
Voltage dependent overcurrent/under impedance protection - Back-up

protection for generators with limited fault current capacity.
Earth fault overcurrent protection - Two stage non-directional back-up

protection.
Neutral voltage displacement protection - Provides protection against earth

faults on high impedance earthed systems.
Sensitive directional earth fault protection - Discriminative earth fault

protection for parallel connected generators.
100% Stator earth fault protection - Provides protection against earth faults
close to the generator star point. {P343 only} overvoltage protection.
Under/overvoltage protection - Two stage undervoltage and two stage Under/over frequency protection - Four stage under frequency and two stage
over frequency protection.
Reverse power - Protection against loss of prime mover. Low forward power - Provides an interlock for non urgent tripping. Over power - Back-up overload protection. Field failure - Two stage element for protection against loss of excitation. Negative phase sequence protection - Provides protection against
unbalanced loading which can cause overheating of the generator. unusual voltage or frequency conditions.
Overfluxing - Provides protection for the generator / transformer against Unintentional energisation at standstill (dead machine) protection - Protection
against inadvertent closing of the generator circuit breaker when the machine is not running. {P343 only} dependent protection elements upon loss of a VT input signal.
Voltage transformer supervision - To prevent mal-operation of voltage Thermal protection via RTD inputs - Thermal protection for the machine
provided by measuring the temperature of winding/bearings etc. via resistive thermal devices embedded within the machine. 10 RTD inputs can be provided. logic to suit particular customer applications.
Programmable scheme logic - Allowing user defined protection and control

1.2.2 Non-protection features Below is a summary of the P340 relay non-protective features.
Measurements - Various measurements of value for display on the relay or

accessed from the serial communications, eg. Currents, voltages, temperature etc. or on the relay display (fault records only on relay display). relay IRIG-B input.
Fault/event/disturbance records - Available from the serial communications Real time clock / time synchronisation - Time synchronisation possible from Four setting groups - Independent setting groups to cater for alternative
power system arrangements or customer specific applications.
Remote serial communications - To allow remote access to the relays. The

following communications protocols are supported; Courier, MODBUS, WorldFIP and IEC870-5-103 (VDEW). to provide maximum relay reliability and availability. circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Continuous self monitoring - Power on diagnostics and self checking routines Circuit breaker state monitoring - Provides indication of discrepancy between Circuit breaker condition monitoring - Provides records / alarm outputs Commissioning test facilities. Section 2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
regarding the number of CB operations, sum of the interrupted current and the breaker operating time.
The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually applied to the relay. 2.1 Configuration column The P340 relays include a column in the menu called the CONFIGURATION column. This affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions. The aim of this column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single point in the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this column do not then appear within the main relay menu. The following table shows the relay menu for the Configuration column, with default settings. The brief description of the function of each setting is also provided. Menu text
CONFIGURATION
Default setting
Available setting No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4
Function Restore default settings to any or all group of settings
Restore Defaults No Operation
Setting Group Active Settings
Select via Menu Select via Menu Select via Optos Group 1 Group Group Group Group 1 2 3 4
Change setting groups by? Select active setting group used for protection settings Saves all setting changes from buffer memory into stored settings
Save Changes
No Operation
No Operation Save Abort
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 5 of 103 Group1,2,3 or 4 Selects a group of settings to copy to the group designated in Copy to cell Copies the group of settings selected in the Copy from cell to the selected setting group Selects if Group 1 settings are available on the relay Selects if Group 2 settings are available on the relay Selects if Group 3 settings are available on the relay Selects if Group 4 settings are available on the relay Enables protection element in the relay
Copy From
Group 1
Copy To
No Operation
Group1,2,3 or 4
Setting Group 1 Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 2 Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Gen Differential Enabled Power Field Failure NPS Thermal Overcurrent Standard E/F SEF/REF Protn Residual O/V NVD 100% Stator E/F V/Hz Dead Machine Volt Protection Freq Protection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled
Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled
System Backup Enabled
RTD Inputs CB Fail Supervision Input Labels
Enabled Disabled Disabled Visible
Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Invisible or Visible
Makes settings visible in the relay menu Selects if relay protection settings are displayed in primary or secondary current/ voltage values
Output Labels RTD Labels CT & VT Ratios Event Recorder Disturb Recorder Measuret Setup Comms Settings Commission Tests Setting Values
Visible Visible Visible Invisible Invisible Invisible Visible Visible Primary
Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Primary or Secondary
2.2
CT and VT ratios The P340 relay allows the current, voltage and impedance settings to be applied to the relay in either primary or secondary quantities. This is done by programming the Setting Values cell of the CONFIGURATION column to either Primary or Secondary. When this cell is set to Primary, all current, voltage and impedance setting values are scaled by the programmed CT and VT ratios. These are found in the VT & CT RATIOS column, settings for which are shown below. Menu text
CT AND VT RATIOS
Default setting
Setting range Min Max 1000000 V 140 V

(Vn=100/120V)
Step size
Main VT Primary Main VT Secy
110 V 110 V
(Vn=100/120V)
100 V 80 V
(Vn=100/120V)
1V 110 V
(Vn=100/ 120V)
400 V
(Vn=400/440V)
360 V
(Vn=400/440V)
480 V
(Vn=400/440V)
400 V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
NVD VT Primary
110 V
100 V
1000000 V
1V
NVD VT Secondary
110 V
(Vn=100/120V)
80 V
(Vn=100/120V)
140 V
(Vn=100/120V)
110V
(Vn=100/ 120V)
400 V
(Vn=400/440V)
360 V
(Vn=400/440V)
480 V
(Vn=400/440V)
400 V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
Phase CT Primary Phase CT Secy E/F CT Primary E/F CT Secondary SEF CT Primary SEF CT Secondary 2.3
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
30000 5 30000 5 30000 5
1 4 1 4 1 4
Generator differential protection Failure of stator windings, or connection insulation, can result in severe damage to the windings and stator core. The extent of the damage will depend upon the fault current level and the duration of the fault. Protection should be applied to limit the degree of damage in order to limit repair costs. For primary generating plant, high-speed disconnection of the plant from the power system may also be necessary to maintain system stability. For generators rated above 1 MVA, it is common to apply generator differential protection. This form of unit protection allows discriminative detection of winding faults, with no intentional time delay, where a significant fault current arises. The zone of protection, defined by the location of the CTs, should be arranged to overlap protection for other items of plant, such as a busbar or a step-up transformer. Circulating current differential protection operates on the principle that current entering and leaving a zone of protection will be equal. Any difference between these currents is indicative of a fault being present in the zone. If CTs are connected as shown in Figure 1 it can be seen that current flowing through the zone of protection will cause current to circulate around the secondary wiring. If the CTs are of the same ratio and have identical magnetising characteristics they will produce identical secondary currents and hence zero current will flow through the relay. If a fault exists within the zone of protection there will be a difference between the output from each CT; this difference flowing through the relay causing it to operate.
Protected zone
Differential relay
Figure 1:
Principle of circulating current differential protection

Heavy through current, arising from an external fault condition, can cause one CT to saturate more than the other, resulting in a difference between the secondary current produced by each CT. It is essential to stabilise the protection for these conditions. Two methods are commonly used. A biasing technique, where the relay setting is raised as through current increases. Alternatively, a high impedance technique, where the relay impedance is such that under maximum through fault conditions, the current in the differential element is insufficient for the relay to operate. The generator differential protection function available in the P343 relay can be used in either biased differential or high impedance differential mode. Both modes of operation are equally valid; users may have a preference for one over the other. The operating principle of each is described in the following sections. A DDB (Digital Data Bus) signal is available to indicate the tripping of each phase of differential protection (DDB 181, DDB182, DDB183), in addition a 3 phase trip DDB signal is provided (DDB180). These signals are used to operate the output relays and trigger the disturbance recorder as programmed into the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL). The state of the DDB signals can also be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. The following table shows the relay menu for the Differential protection element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:-
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 9 of 103 Setting range Min Max Step size
Menu text GROUP 1 GEN DIFF GenDiff Function Gen Diff Is1 Gen Diff k1 Gen Diff Is2 Gen Diff k2 2.3.1
Default setting
Biased 0.1 0 0.1 0
Disabled, Biased, High Impedance 0.05 In A 0 0.05 In A 0 0.5 In A 20% 0.5 In A 20%
N/A 0.01 In A 5% 0.01 In A 5%
Biased differential protection In a biased differential relay, the through current is used to increase the setting of the differential element. For heavy through faults, it is unlikely that the CT outputs at each zone end will be identical, due to the effects of CT saturation. In this case a differential current can be produced. However, the biasing will increase the relay setting, such that the differential spill current is insufficient to operate the relay. The through current is calculated as the average of the scalar sum of the current entering and leaving the zone of protection. This calculated through current is then used to apply a percentage bias to increase the differential setting. The percentage bias can be varied to give the operating characteristic shown in Figure 2.
I DIFF = I 1+ I 2 Operate
I1
I2
K2
Is1
K1 Is2
Restrain
I BIAS = I1+ I2 2
Figure 2:
Biased differential protection operating characteristic

Two bias settings are provided in the P343 relay. The initial bias slope, Gen Diff k1 , is applied for through currents upto Gen Diff Is2 ,. The second bias slope, Gen Diff k2 , is applied for through currents above the Gen Diff Is2 setting.
The operating current of the biased differential element, for any value of through current, can be calculated using the following formulae
I BIAS = I DIFF
I1 + I 2 2 K 2 .I BIAS - (K 2 - K 1 )I S2 + I S1
Where I BIAS > I S2 Where I BIAS < I S2
I DIFF K 1.I BIAS + I S1
The Biased differential protection function uses the two sets of three phase current measurement inputs (IA, IB, IC, IA2, IB2, IC2), connected to measure the phase current at the neutral end and terminals of the machine, as shown in Figure 3. The bias and differential currents are calculated by the relay software, providing a phase segregated differential protection function, and may be viewed in the MEASUREMENTS columns in the relay menu.
I A2 I B2 I C2 IA IB IC
MiCOM P343
Figure 3:
2.3.2
Relay connections for biased differential protection

Setting guidelines for biased differential protection To select biased differential protection the GenDiff Function cell should be set to Biased. The differential current setting, Gen Diff Is1 , should be set to a low setting to protect as much of the machine winding as possible. A setting of 5% of rated current of the machine is generally considered to be adequate. Gen Diff Is2 , the threshold above which the second bias setting is applied, should be set to 120% of the machine rated current. The initial bias slope setting, Gen Diff k1 , should be set to 0% to provide optimum sensitivity for internal faults. The second bias slope may typically be set to 150% to provide adequate stability for external faults. These settings may be increased where low accuracy class CTs are used to supply the protection.
2.3.3
High impedance differential protection The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 4.
Healthy CT Protected zone Zm R CT1 R L1 R st R L2 R If R L3 R CT2 Saturated CT
V s R L4
Voltage across relay circuit V s = KI f (R CT2 + 2R L ) where K = 1.5 Stabilising resistor,R st , limits spill current to Is (relay setting) R st = Vs - RR Is Where R R = relay burden
Figure 4:
Principle of high impedance differential protection

If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary current produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If the magnetising impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum voltage across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault current multiplied by the connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2). The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through the relay is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula shown in Figure 3. An additional non linear resistor, Metrosil, may be required to limit the peak secondary circuit voltage during internal fault conditions. To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault the CTs used to operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 4Vs.
The high impedance differential protection function uses the IA2, IB2, IC2 current inputs connected to measure the differential current in each phase, as shown in Figure 5.
RST = Stabilising resistor NLR = Non-linear resistance (Metrosil)
MiCOM P343 NLR
I A2 I B2 I C2
Figure 5: 2.3.4
Relay connections for high impedance differential protection Setting guidelines for high impedance differential protection To select high impedance differential protection the GenDiff Function cell should be set to High Impedance. The differential current setting, Gen Diff Is1 , should be set to a low setting to protect as much of the machine winding as possible. A setting of 5% of rated current of the machine is generally considered to be adequate. This setting may need to be increased where low accuracy class CTs are used to supply the protection. A check should be made to ensure that the primary operating current of the element is less than the minimum fault current for which the protection should operate. The primary operating current (Iop) will be a function of the current transformer ratio, the relay operating current (Gen Diff Is1), the number of current transformers in parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of each current transformer (Ie) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in three ways: i. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to achieve a specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current.
Ie <
1 I op x - Gen diff Is1 n CT ratio
ii.
To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current.
I op Gen diff Is1 < CT ratio - nI e

iii. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
I op = (CT ratio) x (Gen diff I s1 + nI e )

In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current transformers that are used, a current setting (Gen Diff Is1) must be selected for the high impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the relay current setting (Gen Diff Is1).
R ST =
VS Gen diff Is1
Note: The above formula assumes negligible relay burden USE OF METROSIL NON-LINEAR RESISTORS Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3000V peak. The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current transformer saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a function of maximum internal fault secondary current, the current transformer ratio, the current transformer secondary winding resistance , the current transformer lead resistance to the common point, the relay lead resistance and the stabilising resistor value.
VP = 2 2 VK (Vf - VK )
Vf = I f (R CT + 2R L + R ST )
where Vp = peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions. Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage. Vf = maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur.
If = maximum internal secondary fault current.

RCT = current transformer secondary winding resistance. RL = maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay. RST = relay stabilising resistor. When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils should be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages. Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating characteristics follow the expression:
V = CI 0.25
where V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) C = constant of the non-linear resistor ( metrosil )
I = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) .

With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows;
Vs(rms) x 2 I (rms) = 0.52 C
where Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil. This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted. For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor ( metrosil ), its characteristic should be such that it complies with the following requirements: i. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) current should be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms. for 1A current transformers and approximately 100mA rms. for 5A current transformers. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) should limit the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms., so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
ii.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc. Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions:1. 2. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CTs are as shown in the following table: Relay Voltage Setting
Up to 125V rms 125 to 300V rms
Nominal Characteristic C
450 900
Recommended
Single Pole Relay 600A/S1/S256 600A/S1/S1088
Metrosil Type
Triple Pole Relay 600A/S3/1/S802 600A/S3/1/S1195
0.25 0.25
Note: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer Metrosil Units for Relays with a 5 Amp CT These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 100mA rms (the actual maxium currents passed by the units shown below their type description. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***). The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole relays are as shown in the following table:
Secondary internal fault current Amps rms Up to 200V rms
600A/S1/S1213 50A C = 540/640 35mA rms
2.
Recommended METROSIL Type Relay Voltage Setting 250V rms

600A/S1/S1214 C = 670/800 40mA rms
275V rms
600A/S1/S1214 C =670/800 50mA rms
300V rms
600A/S1/S1223 C = 740/870* 50mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196 100A C = 470/540 70mA rms C = 570/670 75mA rms C =570/670 100mA rms C =620/740* 100mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1219 600A/S3/P/S1220 600A/S3/P/S1221 600A/S3/P/S1222 150A C = 430/500 100mA rms C = 520/620 100mA rms C = 570/670** 100mA rms C =620/740*** 100mA rm
Note: *2400V peak
**2200V peak
***2600V peak
In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control for detailed applications.
Notes: 1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated for each other. To order these units please specify "Triple pole Metrosil type", followed by the single pole type reference. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be supplied if required.
2.
For further advice and guidance on selecting METROSILS please contact the Applications department at ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control. 2.4 Phase fault overcurrent protection A two stage non directional overcurrent element is provided in the P340 relays. This element can be used to provide time delayed back-up protection for the system and high set protection providing fast operation for machine faults. The first stage has a time delayed characteristic that can be set as either Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT). The second stage has a definite time delay, which can be set to zero to produce instantaneous operation. Each stage can be selectively enabled or disabled. This element uses the IA, IB, and IC relay inputs and can be fed from CTs at the terminal or neutral end of the generator, depending on the application. Each stage can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB142, DDB143. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each phase of each stage of protection, (Starts:- DDB276-283, Trips:DDB239-246). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table: Menu Text GROUP 1: Default Setting OVERCURRENT Disabled Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse 0.08 x In A 0 0.025 0.5 0s 4 x In A 100 s 1.2 15 100 s 0.01 x In A 0.01 s 0.025 1 N/A 0.01 s N/A Setting Range Min Max Step Size
I>1 Function
I>1 Current Set I>1 Time Delay I>1 TMS I>1 Time Dial I>1 Reset Char I>1 tRESET I>2 Function
1 x In A 1s 1 7 DT 0s DT
DT or Inverse Disabled or DT
I>2 Current Set I>2 Time Delay
0.08 x In A 0s
0.08 x In A 0s
10 x In A 100 s
0.01 x In A 0.01s
For inverse time delayed characteristics, the following options are available. Note that all IDMT curves conform to the following formula: t = T x { [ K / ((I/Is) - 1)) ] + L} t = operation time K = constant
I = measured current Is = current threshold setting

= constant L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves) T = Time multiplier setting Curve description Standard Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Short Time Inverse Standard IEC IEC IEC UK IEEE IEEE IEEE US US K constant 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.0103 3.922 5.64 5.95 0.005 constant 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 2 2 2 0.04 L constant 0 0 0 0 0.0228 0.0982 0.0243 0.18 0
Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves. Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but the scaling of the time dial is approximately 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the I>1 Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting. The overcurrent protection function operates from the phase currents measured by the IA, IB and IC measurement inputs on the relay. 2.4.1 Application of timer hold facility The first stage of overcurrent protection in the P340 relays are provided with a timer hold facility. Setting the hold timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting.
Setting the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. It will also enable the element to become sensitive to a pole slipping condition where the element will cyclically operate as the machine slips successive poles. If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen for, this time delay is set via the I>1 tRESET setting. If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either definite time or inverse time as selected in cell I>1 Reset Char . If definite time (DT) is selected the I>1 tRESET cell may be used to set the time delay. If inverse time reset (Inverse) is selected the reset time will follow the inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for I>1 Function . Another situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the timer hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. 2.4.2 Setting guidelines for overcurrent protection The first stage of overcurrent protection can be selected by setting I>1 Function to any of the inverse or DT settings. The first stage is disabled if I>1 Function is set to Disabled. The first stage can provide back-up protection for faults on the generator and the system. As such it should be co-ordinated with downstream protection to provide discrimination for system faults, setting the current threshold ( I>1 Current Set ), and the time delay. ( I>1 TMS - for IEC curves; I>1 Time Dial - for US/IEEE curves; I>1 Time Delay for definite time) accordingly. In order to provide back-up protection for the generator and system, the element must be supplied from CTs connected in the generator tails. If terminal end CTs are used, the element will provide protection for the system only, unless the generator is connected in parallel to a second source of supply. The second stage of overcurrent protection can be enabled by setting I>2 Function to DT, providing a definite time operating characteristic. The second stage is disabled if I>2 Function is set to Disabled. Where terminal CTs are used, the second stage can be set as an instantaneous overcurrent protection, providing protection against internal faults on the machine. The current setting of the second stage, I>2 Current Set , could be set to 120% of the maximum fault rating of the generator, typically 8 x full load current. The operating time, I>2 Time Delay , should be set to 0s to give instantaneous operation. The stage will therefore be stable for external faults where the fault current from the generator will be below the stage current setting. For faults within the machine, the fault current will be supplied from the system and will be above the second stage current setting, resulting in fast clearance of the internal fault.
2.5
System back-up protection A generator is a source of electrical power and will supply system faults until they are cleared by system protection. Back-up protection must be applied at the generator so that faults are cleared in the event of downstream protection/ circuit breakers failing to operate. The fault current supplied by a generator will vary during a fault condition as indicated by the generator decrement curve, shown in Figure 6. The fault current response is determined by the action of the automatic voltage regulator on the machine. With some generators, fault current initiates an AVR boost circuit which maintains the fault current at a relatively high level. If the voltage regulator is set to manual control or no boost circuit exists , the fault current can be severely restricted, leading to slow operation of back-up protection for system faults. In the worst case the fault current will fall below the full load rating of the machine, so simple overcurrent protection with a setting above full load current, cannot operate.
Full load current
0.25s
0.5s
Figure 6:
Typical generator fault current decrement curve

System back-up protection must operate quickly during a fault and must not operate for load conditions. To achieve these two objectives, two methods of system back-up protection are commonly used; 1Voltage dependant overcurrent protection. The presence of a fault is detected by an under voltage element and the relay setting is adjusted accordingly. Voltage dependant overcurrent protection can be operated in a voltage controlled or voltage restrained mode. Under impedance protection. This element is set to monitor the system impedance at the terminals of the machine. If the impedance measured falls below a set threshold then the element will operate.
2-
Customer preference will determine the mode of operation. However, subtle application benefits can be claimed for one form of protection over the other in certain circumstances.
A single protection element, that can be configured as either voltage dependant overcurrent or under impedance, is provided in the P340 relay for system back-up protection. The operation of the element is described in the following sections. The function operates from the phase currents measured by the IA, IB and IC measurement inputs on the relay. The System Backup protection element can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB141). DDB signals are also available to indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts:- DDB327, DDB328.DDB329, DDB330, Trips:- DDB187, DDB188, DDB189, DDB190). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table: Menu Text GROUP 1: Default Setting SYSTEM BACK-UP Voltage Controlled Disabled, Voltage Controlled, Voltage Restrained, Under Impedance None, Delta-Star N/A DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse 0.08 x In A 0.5 0s 0.025 0s 20 V 80 V 4 x In A 15 100 s 1.2 100 s 120 V 480 V 0.01 x In A 1 N/A 0.01 s 0.025 0.01 s 1V
(Vn=100/ 120V)
Setting Range Min Max
Step Size
Back-up Function
Vector Rotation V Dep OC Char
None IEC S Inverse
V Dep OC I> Set V Dep OC T Dial V Dep OC Reset V Dep OC Delay V Dep OC TMS V Dep OC tRESET V Dep OC V>1Set
1 x In A 7 DT 1s 1 0s 80 V
(Vn=100/120V)
DT or Inverse
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
320 V
(Vn=400/440V))
4V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V Dep OC V>2Set
60V
(Vn=100/120V)
20V 80V
120V 480V
1V
(Vn=100/ 120V)
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
240V
(Vn=400/440V))
4V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V Dep OC k Set Z< Setting
0.25 70/In
(Vn=100/120V)
0.25 2 2
1 120/In 480/In
0.05s 0.5/In
(Vn=100/
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
120/In
(Vn=400/440V))
2/In
(Vn=400/ 440V)
120V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Z< Time Delay Z< tRESET
5s 0s
0s 0s
100 s 100 s
0.01 s 0.01 s
For inverse time delayed characteristics refer to the phase overcurrent elements, Section 2.4. 2.5.1 Voltage dependant overcurrent protection The generator terminal voltage will drop during fault conditions and so a voltage measuring element can be used to control the current setting of this element. On detection of a fault the current setting is reduced by a factor K. This ensures faults are cleared in spite of the presence of the generator decrement characteristic. Line voltages are used to control each phase overcurrent element as shown below. Phase Current Ia Ib Ic Control Voltage Vab Vbc Vca
A single stage, non directional overcurrent element is provided. The element has a time delayed characteristic that can be set as either Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT). The element can be selectively enabled or disabled and can be blocked via a relay input so that the element can be integrated into a blocked overcurrent protection scheme. The element can be fed from CTs at the terminal or neutral end of the generator. If voltage dependant overcurrent operation is selected, the element can be set in one of two modes, voltage controlled overcurrent or voltage restrained overcurrent. 2.5.1.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection In this mode of operation, the under voltage detector is used to produce a step change in the relay current setting (from V Dep OC I> Set to V Dep OC k Set x V Dep OC I> Set ), when voltage falls below the voltage setting, V Dep OC V>1 Set . Under load conditions the relay can have a high current setting greater than full load current. Under fault conditions the relay is switched to a more sensitive setting leading to fast fault clearance. The operating characteristic of the current setting when voltage controlled mode is selected is shown in Figure 7.
Current setting I> Set
KI> Set
V<1 Set
Measured voltage
Figure 7:
Modification of current pickup level for voltage controlled overcurrent protection

Where the generator is directly connected to a busbar, voltage controlled overcurrent protection may be preferred.
2.5.1.2 Setting guidelines Voltage controlled Backup Function Function is set to
for voltage controlled overcurrent function overcurrent protection can be selected by setting to Voltage controlled. The protection is disabled if Backup Disabled.
The current setting, V Dep OC I> Set , should be set to have a primary operating value in excess of the maximum generator load current. The current setting multiplying factor, V Dep OC k Set , governs the protection function setting under low voltage conditions. This should be set to give a primary operating current less than 50% of the minimum steady-state fault current for a multi-phase fault at the remote end of a feeder, with the generator being the only source. This ensures the element will provide adequate back-up protection for an uncleared fault on that feeder. The voltage-controlled protection fault characteristic should co-ordinate with outgoing feeder protection for a feeder fault under minimum plant conditions. The operating characteristic, V Dep OC Char and the time delay.( V Dep OC TMS - for IEC curves; V Dep OC T Dial - for US/IEEE curves; V Dep OC Delay for definite time) should be selected accordingly. Where parallel sources are present, a remote sufficient voltage reduction to enable the fault applications a time undervoltage element can Section 2.6). Alternatively, negative sequence (see Section 2.11). feeder fault may not result in a characteristic. For such be used to clear the fault (see thermal protection could be used
The voltage setting for switching between load and fault characteristics, V Dep OC V<1 Set , should be greater than the terminal voltage for a fault where back-up protection is required. On a solidly earthed system the element can be made insensitive to earth faults by ensuring that the voltage setting is below 57%Vn (minimum phase to phase voltage for a single phase to earth
fault). A typical setting would be 30%Vn. A voltage setting higher than 57%Vn will allow the relay operating characteristic to change for both phase and earth faults. More accurate settings may be determined with reference to the following equations. The minimum fault current for a remote-end multi-phase fault on a feeder can be determined as follows. This calculation is based on no-load excitation being applied and no field-forcing or AVR action during the fault. Three-phase fault:
If =
(nRf ) + (X s + nX f )2
2
En
Phase to phase fault:
If =
(2nRf ) + (X s + X 2 + 2nX f )2
2
3En
Where: If = Minimum generator primary current seen for a multi-phase feeder-end fault
En = No-load phase-neutral internal e.m.f. of generator Xs = Direct-axis synchronous reactance of the generator X2 = Negative phase sequence reactance of the generator Rf = Feeder positive phase sequence resistance Xf = Feeder positive phase sequence reactance n = Number of parallel generators The steady-state voltage seen by the relay under external fault conditions can be deduced as follows: Three-phase fault:
V - =
En 3 (nR f ) + (nX f )
2
(nR f )2 + (X s + nX f )2
)
2
Phase-phase fault:
V - =
(2nRf )2 + (X s + X 2 + 2nX f )2
2En 3 (nR f ) + (nX f )

2
The current setting multiplier, V Dep OC k Set , must be set such that V Dep OC k Set x V Dep OC I Set is less than If as calculated above. The voltage setting, V Dep OC V<1 Set , must be greater than V .
-
The voltage controlled overcurrent protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as described in Section 2.2.1. Setting the hold timer to a value other than zero delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen, this hold time delay is set via the V Dep OC tRESET setting.
If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either definite time or inverse time as selected in cell V Dep OC Reset Char . If definite time (DT) is selected the V Dep OC tRESET cell may be used to set the time delay, as above. If inverse time reset (Inverse) is selected the reset time will follow the inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for V Dep OC Function . 2.5.1.3 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection In voltage restrained mode the effective operating current of the protection element is continuously variable as the applied voltage varies between two voltage thresholds, V Dep OC V<1 Set and V Dep OC V<2 Set , as shown in Figure 8. In this mode, it is quite difficult to determine the behaviour of the protection function during a fault. This protection mode is, however, considered to be better suited to applications where the generator is connected to the system via a generator transformer. With indirect connection of the generator, a solid phase-phase fault on the local busbar will result in only a partial phase-phase voltage collapse at the generator terminals.
Current setting I> Set
KI> Set
V<2 Set
V<1 Set
Measured voltage
Figure 8:
Modification of current pickup level for voltage restrained overcurrent protection

To improve the sensitivity of the voltage-restrained overcurrent protection function, for HV phase-phase faults fed via a Yd1 or Yd11 step-up transformer, the appropriate voltage signal transformation facility should be switched in as part of the P340 settings. In the past, such correction of voltage signals has been addressed by adopting phase-neutral voltage measurement or the use of a star/delta interposing VT. Such an approach cannot be adopted with P340 since the relay voltage inputs are common to other protection and measurement functions that would be undesirably affected by voltage signal correction. The P340 voltage-restrained current setting is related to measured voltage as follows:
For Vs2 < V < Vs1: Current setting (Is) = K.I > + I > - K.
For V < Vs2: Current setting (Is) = K.I> Where: I> = V Dep OC I> Set
For V > Vs1: Current setting (Is) = I>
I V - Vs2 I > Vs1 - Vs2
Is = Current setting at voltage V

V = Voltage applied to relay element Vs1 = V Dep OC V<1 Set Vs2 = V Dep OC V<2 Set 2.5.1.4 Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent function Voltage restrained overcurrent protection can be selected by setting Backup Function to Voltage Restrained. The protection is disabled if Backup Function is set to Disabled. The performance criteria on which the settings of the voltage-restrained overcurrent protection function should be based are similar to those discussed for the voltage controlled mode in Section 2.5.1.2. Co-ordination with downstream protection should be ensured when the relay is on its most sensitive settings i.e. for voltages less than the V Dep OC V<2 Set setting. Current threshold, characteristic and time delay can be selected as described for the Voltage Controlled function described in Section 2.5.1.2 The voltage restrained overcurrent function should be able to respond to a remote-end fault on an outgoing feeder. Where the generator is connected via a step up transformer, zero sequence quantities will not be present at the relay location for HV side earth faults. Therefore, it would be normal to use negative sequence thermal protection for back-up protection in this case. The negative phase sequence thermal element will also provide back-up protection for phase to phase faults. For this reason, consideration will only be given to the detection of a remote-end three-phase feeder fault, with the protected machine as the only source. For a remote-end, three-phase fault, it is possible to calculate the level of current and voltage at the relay location. It should be ensured that the relay current setting, V Dep OC k Set x V Dep OC I Set , should be set to less than 50% of the fault current. It must also be ensured that the voltage threshold, V Dep OC V<2 Set , is set to a value above the voltage measured at the relay. There would be no need for further reduction in the current setting for closer faults, which would yield higher currents and lower voltages. Further reduction in the current setting for closer faults may make co-ordination with local feeder overcurrent protection more difficult (if this is not already a problem). The steady-state primary current and voltage magnitudes seen for a feeder remote-end three-phase fault are given as follows:
If =
(nRf ) + (X s + X t + nX f )2
2
En
V - =
En 3 (nR f ) + (X t + nX f )
2 2
(nR f ) + (X s + X t + nX f )
Where:
If =
En = Xs = X2 = Xt = Rf = Xf = n =
Minimum generator primary current seen for a multi-phase feeder-end fault No-load phase-neutral internal e.m.f. of generator Direct-axis synchronous reactance of the generator Negative phase sequence reactance of the generator Step-up transformer reactance Feeder positive phase sequence resistance Feeder positive phase sequence reactance Number of parallel generators
All above quantities are to referred to the generator side of the transformer. The upper voltage threshold setting, V Dep OC V<1 Set , should be set below the minimum corrected phase-phase voltage level for a close-up HV earth fault, to ensure that the element is insensitive to the fault. In the case of HV solid earthing, this voltage would be a minimum of 57% of the nominal operating voltage. The voltage restrained overcurrent protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as described in Section 2.2.1. Setting the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen, this hold time delay is set via the V Dep OC tRESET setting. If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either definite time or inverse time as selected in cell V Dep OC Reset Char . If definite time (DT) is selected the V Dep OC tRESET cell may be used to set the time delay, as above. If inverse time reset (Inverse) is selected the reset time will follow the inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for V Dep OC Function . 2.5.2 Under impedance protection When the element is set to under impedance mode the element operates with a time delayed three phase non directional impedance characteristic, shown in Figure 9.
Trip
Figure 9:
Under impedance element tripping characteristic
Impedance for each phase is calculated as shown:
Zab =
Vab Ia
Zbc =
Vbc Ib
Zab =
Vca Ic
With rated voltage applied, the element operates as a definite time overcurrent relay. It operates at a lower current as the voltage reduces, hence the element is similar to a voltage restrained overcurrent element, operating with a definite time characteristic. Under impedance protection is an alternative to voltage dependent overcurrent protection and is often preferred due to its ease of setting. It may however be difficult to provide co-ordination with downstream inverse time overcurrent protections. 2.5.2.1 Setting guidelines for under impedance function Under impedance protection can be selected by setting Backup Function to Under Impedance. The protection is disabled if Backup Function is set to Disabled. The impedance setting of the relay, Z< Setting , should be set to 70% of the maximum load impedance. This gives an adequate margin for short time overloads, voltage variation etc., whilst giving adequate back-up protection for generator, generator transformer and busbar faults. The time delay, Z< Time Delay should allow co-ordination with downstream overcurrent devices. The under impedance protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as described in section 2.2.1. Setting the hold timer, Z< tRESET , to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timer for this period.
2.6
Undervoltage protection function (27) Under voltage protection is not a commonly specified requirement for generator protection schemes. However, under voltage elements are sometimes used as interlocking elements for other types of protection, such as field failure. In the P340, this type of interlocking can be arranged via the relay scheme logic. Undervoltage protection may also be used for back-up protection where it may be difficult to provide adequate sensitivity with voltage dependant / underimpedance / negative phase sequence elements. For an isolated generator, or isolated set of generators, a prolonged undervoltage condition could arise for a number of reasons. One reason would be failure of automatic voltage regulation (AVR) equipment. Where an auxiliary transformer is used to supply generator ancillary equipment, such as boiler-feed pumps, air-blowers, lubrication pumps etc., a prolonged undervoltage condition could adversely affect the performance of the machine. If such a situation is envisaged, the application of time-delayed undervoltage protection might be a consideration. A two stage undervoltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation. Selectable, fixed Logic is included within the relay to allow the operation of the element to be inhibited during periods when the machine is isolated from the external system. Each stage of undervoltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB158, DDB159). DDB signals are also available to indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts:- DDB258265, Trips:- DDB215-222). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table Menu Text GROUP 1: Default Setting VOLTAGE PROTECTION Sub Heading Phase-Neutral Any-phase DT 80 V
(Vn=100/120V)
Step Size
Undervoltage V< Measurt Mode V< Operate Mode V<1 Function V<1 Voltage Set
Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral Any Phase, Three phase Disabled, DT, IDMT 10 V 40 V 120 V 480 V 1V
(Vn=100/ 120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
320 V
(Vn=400/440V)
4V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V<1 Time Delay V<1 TMS
1s 1
0s 0.5
100 s 100
0.01 s 0.5
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 29 of 103 Enabled DT 80 V 10 V 40 V

(Vn=400/440V)
V<1 Poledead Inh V<2 Function V<2 Voltage Set
Disabled Enabled Disabled DT 120 V 480 V

(Vn=400/440V)
1V
(Vn=100/ 120V)
(Vn=100/120V)
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
320 V
(Vn=400/440V)
4V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
V<2 Time Delay V<1 Poledead Inh
1s Enabled
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Disabled, Enabled
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t = K / (1 - M) Where; K = Time Multiplier Setting (V>1 TMS) t = Operating Time in Seconds M = Measured Voltage / Relay Setting Voltage (V<1 Voltage Set) 2.6.1 Setting guidelines for undervoltage protection Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (for inverse time delayed operation) , DT (for definite time delayed operation) or Disabled, within the V<1 Function cell. Stage 2 is definite time only and is Enabled/Disabled in the V<2 Status cell. The time delay.( V<1 TMS - for IDMT curve; V<1 Time Delay , V<2 Time Delay - for definite time) should be adjusted accordingly. The undervoltage protection can be set to operate from phase-phase or phaseneutral voltage as selected by V< Measurt Mode . Single or three phase operation can be selected in V<1 Operate Mode . When Any Phase is selected, the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when Three Phase is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages are below the setting. If the undervoltage protection function is to be used for back-up protection, the voltage setting , V<1 Voltage Set , should be set above the steady-state phase-phase voltage seen by the relay for a three-phase fault at the remote end of any feeder connected to the generator bus. Allowances should be made for the fault current contribution of parallel generators, which will tend to keep the generator voltage up. If the element is set to operate from phase to phase voltages operation for earth faults can be minimised, ie. set V< Measurt Mode to Phase-Phase. To allow detection of any phase to phase fault, V< Operate Mode should be set to Any-Phase. Equations for determining the phase-phase voltage seen by the relay under such circumstances are given in Section 2.5.1.2. The operating characteristic would normally be set to definite time, set V<1 Function to DT. The time delay, V<1 Time Delay , should be set to coordinate with downstream protections and the System Back-up protection of the relay, if enabled. Additionally, the delay should be long enough to prevent
unwanted operation of the under voltage protection for transient voltage dips. These may occur during clearance of faults further into the power system or by starting of local machines. The required time delay would typically be in excess of 3s-5s. The second stage can be used as an alarm stage to warn the user of unusual voltage conditions so that corrections can be made. This could be useful if the machine is being operated with the AVR selected to manual control. Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (eg. requirements of G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with voltage outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. To prevent operation of any under voltage stage during normal shutdown of the generator poledead logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated by selecting V Poledead Inh to Enabled. This will ensure that when a Poledead condition is detected (ie. all phase currents below the undercurrent threshold or CB Open, as determined by an opto isolator and the PSL) the undervoltage element will be inhibited. 2.7 Overvoltage protection A generator terminal overvoltage condition could arise when the generator is running but not connected to a power system, or where a generator is providing power to an islanded power system. Such an over voltage could arise in the event of a fault with automatic voltage regulating equipment or if the voltage regulator is set for manual control and an operator error is made. Overvoltage protection should be set to prevent possible damage to generator insulation, prolonged overfluxing of the generating plant, or damage to power system loads. When a generator is synchronised to a power system with other sources, an overvoltage could arise if the generator is lightly loaded supplying a high level of power system capacitive charging current. An overvoltage condition might also be possible following a system separation, where a generator might experience full-load rejection whilst still being connected to part of the original power system. The automatic voltage regulating equipment and machine governor should quickly respond to correct the overvoltage condition in these cases. However, over voltage protection is advisable to cater for a possible failure of the voltage regulator or for the regulator having been set to manual control. In the case of Hydro generators, the response time of the speed governing equipment can be so slow that transient over speeding up to 200% of nominal speed could occur. Even with voltage regulator action, such over speeding can result in a transient over voltage as high as 150%. Such a high voltage could result in rapid insulation damage. A two stage overvoltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation. Each stage of overvoltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB160, DDB161). DDB signals are also available to indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts:- DDB266-273, Trips:DDB223-230). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed
in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table Menu Text GROUP 1: Overvoltage V> Measurt Mode V> Operate Mode V>1 Function V>1 Voltage Set Phase-Neutral Any-phase DT 150 V
(Vn=100/120V)
Default Setting VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Setting Range Min Sub Heading Max
Step Size
Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral Any Phase, Three phase Disabled, DT, IDMT 60 V 240 V 185 V 740 V 1V
(Vn=100/ 120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
600 V
(Vn=400/440V)
4V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V>1 Time Delay V>1 TMS V>2 Status V>2 Voltage Set
1s 1 DT 130 V
(Vn=100/120V)
0s 0.5 60 V 240 V
(Vn=400/440V)
100 s 100 Disabled DT 185 V 740 V

(Vn=400/440V)
0.01 s 0.5 1V
(Vn=100/ 120V)
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
520 V
(Vn=400/440V)
4V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
V>2 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t = K / (M - 1) Where; K = Time Multiplier Setting ( V>1 TMS ) t = Operating Time in Seconds M = Measured Voltage / Relay Setting Voltage ( V>1 Voltage Set ) 2.7.1 Setting guidelines for overvoltage protection Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (for inverse time delayed operation), DT (for definite time delayed operation) or Disabled, within the V>1 Function cell. Stage 2 has a definite time delayed characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the V>2 Status cell. The time delay.( V>1 TMS - for IDMT curve; V>1 Time Delay , V>2 Time Delay - for definite time) should be selected accordingly. The undervoltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or PhaseNeutral voltage as selected by V> Measurt Mode cell. Single or three phase operation can be selected in V> Operate Mode cell. When Any Phase is
selected the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when Three Phase is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages are above the setting. Generators can typically withstand a 5% overvoltage condition continuously. The withstand times for higher overvoltages should be declared by the generator manufacturer. To prevent operation during earth faults, the element should operate from the phase-phase voltages, to achieve this V>1 Measurt Mode can be set to Phase-Phase with V>1 Operating Mode set to Three-Phase. The overvoltage threshold, V>1 Voltage Set , should typically be set to 100%-120% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay. The time delay, V>1 Time Delay , should be set to prevent unwanted tripping of the delayed overvoltage protection function due to transient over voltages that do not pose a risk to the generating plant; eg. following load rejection where correct AVR/ Governor control occurs. The typical delay to be applied would be 1s-3s, with a longer delay being applied for lower voltage threshold settings. The second stage can be used to provide instantaneous high-set over voltage protection. The typical threshold setting to be applied, V>2 Voltage Set , would be 130-150% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay, depending on plant manufacturers advice. For instantaneous operation, the time delay, V>2 Time Delay , should be set to 0s. Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (eg. requirements of G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with voltages outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. If phase to neutral operation is selected, care must be taken to ensure that the element will grade with downstream protections during earth faults, where the phase-neutral voltage can rise significantly. 2.8 Underfrequency protection Underfrequency operation of a generator will occur when the power system load exceeds the prime mover capability of an islanded generator or group of generators. Power system overloading can arise when a power system becomes split, with load left connected to a set of islanded generators that is in excess of their capacity. Such events could be compensated for by automatic load shedding. In this case, underfrequency operation would be a transient condition. In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful, the generators should be provided with back-up underfrequency protection. An underfrequency condition, at nominal voltage, may result in some over fluxing of a generator and its associated electrical plant. However, the more critical considerations would be in relation to blade stresses being incurred with high-speed turbine generators; especially steam-driven sets. When not running at nominal frequency, abnormal blade resonances can be set up which, if prolonged, could lead to turbine disc component fractures. Such effects can be accumulative and so operation at frequencies away from nominal should be limited as much as possible, to avoid the need for early plant inspections/ overhaul. Underfrequency running is difficult to contend with, since there is little action that can be taken at the generating station in the event of overloading,
other than to shut the generator down. Four independent definite time-delayed stages of underfrequency protection are offered. Two additional overfrequency stages can also be reconfigured as underfrequency protection by reprogramming the Programmable Scheme Logic. As well as being able to initiate generator tripping, the underfrequency protection can also be arranged to initiate local load-shedding, where appropriate. Selectable fixed scheme logic is provided to allow each stage of underfrequency protection to be disabled when the outgoing CB is open, to prevent unnecessary load tripping. Each stage of underfrequency protection can also be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB162-DDB165). DDB signals are also available to indicate start and trip of each stage, (Starts:- DDB301-304, Trips:DDB231-234). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table: Menu Text GROUP 1: F<1 Status F<1 Setting F<1 Time Delay F<2 Status F>2 Setting F<2 Time Delay F<3 Status F>3 Setting F<3 Time Delay F<4 Status F<4 Setting F<4 Time Delay F< Function Link Default Setting Setting Range Min FREQUENCY PROTECTION Sub Heading Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s 1111 Bit Bit Bit Bit 45 Hz 0.1 s 0 1 2 3 Enable Enable Enable Enable 45 Hz 0.1 s 45 Hz 0.1 s 45 Hz 0.1 s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Disabled Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Disabled Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Block Block Block Block F<1 F<2 F<3 F<4 during during during during 0.01 Hz 0.1 s Poledead Poledead Poledead Poledead 0.01 Hz 0.1 s 0.01 Hz 0.1 s 0.01 Hz 0.1 s Under frequency Max Step Size
2.8.1
Setting guidelines for underfrequency protection Each stage of under frequency protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled, within the F<x Status cells. The frequency pickup setting, F<x Setting , and time delays, F<x Time Delay , for each stage should be selected accordingly.
The protection function should be set so that declared frequency-time limits for the generating set are not infringed. Typically, a 10% under frequency condition should be continuously sustainable. For industrial generation schemes, where generation and loads may be under common control/ownership, the P340 under frequency protection function could be used to initiate local system load-shedding. Four stage under frequency/ load shedding can be provided. The final stage of underfrequency protection should be used to trip the generator. Where separate load shedding equipment is provided, the underfrequency protection should co-ordinate with it. This will ensure that generator tripping will not occur in the event of successful load shedding following a system overload. Two stages of under frequency protection could be set-up, as illustrated in Figure 10, to co-ordinate with multi-stage system load-shedding. Frequency
fn F1< B C F2< Turbine prohibited area t2 A B C t1 System frequency response with minimum load shed for recovery System frequency response with under shedding of load Optimum underfrequency protection characteristic Time A
Figure 10:
Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with system load shedding
To prevent operation of any underfrequency stage during normal shutdown of the generator poledead logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated for each stage by setting the relevant bit in F< Function Link . For example if F< Function Link is set to 0111, Stage 1, 2 and 3 of underfrequency protection will be blocked when the generator CB is open. Selective blocking of
the frequency protection stages in this way will allow a single stage of protection to be enabled during synchronisation or offline running to prevent unsynchronised overfluxing of the machine. When the machine is synchronised, and the CB closed, all stages of frequency protection will be enabled providing a multi stage load shed scheme if desired. Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (eg. requirements of G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. Where the local external load exceeds the generator capacity, underfrequency protection may be used to provide Loss of Mains protection. 2.9 Overfrequency protection function Overfrequency running of a generator arises when the mechanical power input to the alternator is in excess of the electrical load and mechanical losses. The most common occurrence of overfrequency is after substantial loss of load. When a rise in running speed occurs, the governor should quickly respond to reduce the mechanical input power, so that normal running speed is quickly regained. Overfrequency protection may be required as a back-up protection function to cater for governor or throttle control failure following loss of load or during unsynchronised running. Moderate overfrequency operation of a generator is not as potentially threatening to the generator and other electrical plant as underfrequency running. Action can be taken at the generating plant to correct the situation without necessarily shutting down the generator. Severe overfrequency operation of a high-speed generating set could result in plant damage, as described in Section 2.12, as a result of the high centrifugal forces that would be imposed on rotating components. Two independent time-delayed stages of overfrequency protection are provided. Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB166,DDB167). DDB signals are also available to indicate start and trip of each stage, (Starts:- DDB301-304, Trips:- DDB231-234). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table Menu Text GROUP 1: F>1 Status F>1 Setting F>1 Time Delay F>2 Status F>2 Setting F>2 Time Delay Default Setting FREQUENCY PROTECTION Sub Heading Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s Enabled 49.5 Hz 4s 45 Hz 0.1 s 45 Hz 0.1 s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s Disabled, Enabled 65 Hz 100 s 0.01 Hz 0.1 s 0.01 Hz 0.1 s Setting Range Min Overfrequency Max Step Size
2.9.1
Setting guidelines for overfrequency protection Each stage of overfrequency protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled, within the F>x Status cells. The frequency pickup setting, F>x Setting , and time delays, F>x Time Delay , for each stage should be selected accordingly. The P340 overfrequency settings should be selected to co-ordinate with normal, transient overfrequency excursions following full-load rejection. The generator manufacturer should declare the expected transient overfrequency behaviour, which should comply with international governor response standards. A typical overfrequency setting would be 10% above nominal. Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (eg. requirements of G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.
2.10
Field failure protection function (40) Complete loss of excitation may arise as a result of accidental tripping of the excitation system, an open circuit or short circuit occurring in the excitation DC circuit, flashover of any slip rings or failure of the excitation power source. The field failure protection of the P340 consists of two elements, an impedance element with two time delayed stages and a power factor alarm element, illustrated below in Figure 11. The elements operate from A phase current and A phase voltage signals measured by the IA and VA inputs on the relay. X
Normal machine operating impedance - Xa2 - Xa1 R Alarm angle
Xb2
Xb1
Figure 11:
Field failure protection characteristics
When the excitation of a synchronous generator fails, its internal e.m.f. will decay. This results in the active power output of the machine falling and in an increasing level of reactive power being drawn from the power system. As the active power output falls, the mechanical drive can accelerate the machine so
that it will gently pole-slip and run at a super synchronous speed. This results in slip frequency currents being induced in the rotor body, damper windings and in the field windings. The slip-induced, low-frequency rotor currents will result in a rotor flux being produced. The machine would then be excited from the power system and hence be operating as an induction generator. The ability to reach such a stabilised state will be dependent on the machines effective speed-torque characteristic when operating as an induction generator, and also on the power system being able to supply the required reactive power without severe voltage depression. Stable operation as an induction generator might be achieved at low slip (0.10.2% above synchronous speed), particularly in the case of salient pole machines. The machine may be able to maintain an active power output (perhaps 20-30% of rating) whilst drawing reactive power from the power system (generating at a highly leading power factor). This condition could probably be sustained for many minutes without rotor damage being incurred and may not be detectable by traditional field failure impedance characteristic elements. The P340, however, offers a power factor alarm element in the field failure protection which can operate when the generator is running in this condition. Cylindrical rotor machines have a much lower output capability when operating as an induction generator under excitation failure conditions. They are more likely to be pushed over the peak torque level of their induction generator speed-torque characteristic. If the peak induction generator torque level is exceeded, a machine can stabilise at a much higher level of slip (perhaps 5% above synchronous speed). When this happens, the machine will draw a very high reactive current from the power system and a stator winding current as high as 2.0 p.u. may be reached. The slip-frequency rotor currents could lead to rotor core or winding damage if the condition is sustained. Operation as an induction generator under field failure conditions relies upon the ability of the rest of the system being able to supply the required reactive power to the machine. If the system cannot supply enough reactive power the system voltage will drop and the system may become unstable. This could occur if a large generator running at high power suffers a loss of field when connected to a relatively weak system. To ensure fast tripping under this condition one of the impedance elements can be used with a short time delay. This can trip the machine quickly to preserve system stability. This element should have a small diameter to prevent tripping under power swinging conditions. The second impedance element, set with a larger diameter, can provide detection of field failure under lightly loaded conditions. This second element should be time delayed to prevent operation during power swing conditions. The Field Failure protection impedance elements are also provided with an adjustable delay on reset (delayed drop off) timer . This time delay can be set to avoid delayed tripping that may arise as a result of cyclic operation of the impedance measuring element, during the period of pole-slipping following loss of excitation. Some care would need to be exercised in setting this timer, since it could make the Field Failure protection function more likely to give an unwanted trip in the case of stable power swinging. The impedance element trip time delay should therefore be increased when setting the reset time delay.
The delay on reset timer might also be set to allow the field failure protection function to be used for detecting pole slipping of the generator when excitation is not fully lost; eg. following time-delayed clearance of a nearby power system fault. This subject is discussed in more detail in Section 2.21. DDB signals are available to indicate tripping of each stage (DDB184, DDB185). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for the field failure elements are shown in the following table: Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min Group 1 Feild failure FFail Alm Status FFail Alm Angle FFail Alm Delays FFail1 Status FFail1 -Xa1 Disabled 15 5s Enabled 20/In
(Vn=100/120V)
Step Size
Max Disabled Enabled
15 0s 0
(Vn=100/120V)
75 100s Disabled, Enabled 40/In

(Vn=100/120V)
1 0.1s 0.5/In
(Vn=100/120V)
80/In
160/In 40/In
2/In
(Vn=400/440V)
FFail1 Xb1
20/In
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=100/120V)
(Vn=400/440V)
0.5/In 2/In
(Vn=100/120V)
80/In
(Vn=100/120V)
160/In
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
FFail1 TimeDelay FFail1 DO Timer FFail2 Status FFail2 -Xa
5s 0s Enabled 20/In
(Vn=100/120V)
0s 0s 0
(Vn=100/120V)
100 s 10 s Disabled, Enabled 40/In

(Vn=100/120V)
0.1 s 0.1 s 0.5/In

(Vn=100/120V)
80/In
160/In 40/In
2/In
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
FFail2 Xb2
20/In
(Vn=100/120V)
0
(Vn=100/120V)
0.5/In
(Vn=100/120V)
80/In
(Vn=100/120V)
160/In
2/In
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
(Vn=400/440V)
FFail2 TimeDelay FFail2 DO Timer
5s 0s
0s 0s
100 s 10 s
0.1 s 0.1 s
2.10.1 Setting guidelines for field failure protection Each stage of field failure protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled, within the FFail1 Status , FFail2 Status cells. The power factor alarm element may be selected as Enabled or Disabled within the FFail Alm Status cell.
2.10.1.1Impedance element 1 To quickly detect a loss-of field condition, the diameter of the field failure impedance characteristic ( FFail1 Xb1 ) should be set as large as possible, without conflicting with the impedance that might be seen under normal stable conditions or during stable power swing conditions. Where a generator is operated with a rotor angle of less than 90 and never at a leading power factor, it is recommended that the diameter of the impedance characteristic, FFail1 Xb1 , is set equal to the generator direct-axis synchronous reactance. The characteristic offset, FFail1 -Xa1 should be set equal to half the direct-axis transient reactance (0.5Xd) in secondary ohms. FFail1 Xb1 = Xd FFail1 -Xa1 = 0.5 Xd Where: Xd = Generator direct-axis synchronous reactance in ohms Xd = Generator direct-axis transient reactance in ohms Where high-speed voltage regulation equipment is used it may be possible to operate generators at rotor angles up to 120 . In this case, the impedance characteristic diameter, FFail1 Xb1 , should be set to 50% of the direct-axis synchronous reactance (0.5Xd) and the offset, FFail1 -Xa1 , should be set to 75% of the direct axis transient reactance (0.75Xd). FFail1 Xb1 = 0.5 Xd FFail1 -Xa1 = 0.75 Xd The field failure protection time delay, FFail1 Time Delay , should be set to minimise the risk of operation of the protection function during stable power swings following system disturbances or synchronisation. However, it should be ensured that the time delay is not so long that stator winding or rotor thermal damage will occur. A typical stator winding should be able to withstand a current of 2.0 p.u. for the order of 15s. It may also take some time for the impedance seen at the generator terminals to enter the characteristic of the protection. A time delay less than 10s would typically be applied. The minimum permissible delay, to avoid problems of false tripping due to stable power swings with the above impedance settings, would be of the order of 0.5s. The protection reset (delayed drop off) timer, FFail1 DO Timer , would typically be set to 0s to give instantaneous reset of the stage. A setting other than 0s can be used to provide an integrating function for instances when the impedance may cyclically enter and exit the characteristic. This can allow detection of pole slipping conditions, for more information see Section 2.21. When settings other than 0s are used the protection pick-up time delay, FFail1 Time Delay , should be increased to prevent mal-operation during stable power swing conditions.
2.10.1.2
Impedance element 2 The second impedance element can be set to give fast operation when the field fails under high load conditions. The diameter of the characteristic, FFail2 Xb2 , should be set to 1 p.u. The characteristic offset, FFail2 -Xa2 , should be set equal to half the direct-axis transient reactance (0.5Xd).
FFail1 Xb2 =
kV 2 MVA
FFail2 Xb2 = 0.5Xd
This setting will detect a field failure condition from full load to about 30% load. The time delay, FFail2 Time Delay , can be set to instantaneous, ie. 0s. The protection reset (delayed drop off) timer, FFail2 DO Timer , would typically be set to 0s to give instantaneous reset of the stage. A setting other than 0s can be used to provide an integrating function for instances when the impedance may cyclically enter and exit the characteristic. This can allow detection of pole slipping conditions, for more information see Section 2.21. When settings other than 0s are used the protection pick-up time delay, FFail2 Time Delay , should be increased to prevent maloperation during stable power swing conditions. 2.10.1.3 Power factor element Salient pole machines can run continuously as induction generators generating significant power and operation under these conditions may not be detectable by an impedance characteristic. The power factor alarm can be used to signal to the operator that excitation has failed under these conditions. The angle setting, FFail Alm Angle , should be set to greater than any angle that the machine could be operated at in normal running. A typical setting would be 15 , equivalent to a power factor of 0.96 leading. The power factor element time delay, FFail Alm Delay , should be set longer than the impedance element time delay setting ( FFail1 Time Delay ) to prevent operation of the alarm element under transient conditions such as power swinging. 2.11 Negative phase sequence thermal protection The Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) protection provided by the P340 is a true thermal replica with a definite-time alarm stage. The relay derives the negative phase sequence operating quantity from the following equation:
I a + a2 I b + aI c I2 = 3
, where a = 1.0/120
Unbalanced loading results in the flow of positive and negative sequence current components. Load unbalance can arise as a result of single phase loading, non-linear loads (involving power electronics or arc furnaces, etc.), uncleared or repetitive asymmetric faults, fuse operation, single-pole tripping and reclosing on transmission systems, broken overhead line conductors and asymmetric failures of switching devices. Any negative phase sequence component of stator current will set up a reverse-rotating component of stator
flux that passes the rotor at twice synchronous speed. Such a flux component will induce double frequency eddy currents in the rotor, which can cause overheating of the rotor body, main rotor windings, damper windings etc. Where a machine has a high continuous negative phase sequence current withstand level (I2 amp), as in the case of typical salient-pole machines, it would not be essential to enable the NPS protection function. The NPS protection function can, however, offer a better method of responding to an uncleared asymmetric fault remote from the generator bus. As mentioned in Section 2.5.1.2, it may be difficult to set the voltage dependant overcurrent protection function to detect a remote fault and co-ordinate with feeder backup protection for a close-up 3-phase fault. Many traditional forms of generator NPS thermal protection relays have been designed with an extremely inverse (I22t) operating time characteristic. Where the operating time of the characteristic is dependent solely on the instantaneous magnitude of negative phase sequence current present. This characteristic would be set to match the claimed generator thermal capacity. This is satisfactory when considering the effects of high values of negative phase sequence current. The basic expression of t = K/I2cmr does not cater for the effects of heat dissipation or for low standing levels of negative phase sequence current. The latter resulting in an increase in rotor temperature which remains within the machines design limits. An existing, tolerable, level of negative phase sequence current (I2<I2cmr), has the effect of reducing the time to reach the critical temperature level, if the negative phase sequence current level should increase beyond I2cmr. The P340 NPS thermal replica is designed to overcome these problems by modelling the effects of low standing levels of negative phase sequence currents. The P340 negative phase sequence element offers a true thermal characteristic according to the following formula:
( I 2 > 2 Current set) 2 ( I 2 > 2 k Setting) t=Loge 1 - 2 ( I 2 > 2 Current set) I2

Note: All current terms are in per-unit, based on the relay rated current, In. When the protected generator sees a reduction in negative phase sequence current, metallic rotor components will decrease in temperature. The relay is provided with a separate cooling time constant setting (Kreset), used when there is a reduction in I2. The negative sequence protection element will respond to system phase to earth and phase to phase faults. Therefore, the element must be set to grade with downstream earth and phase fault protections. To aid grading with downstream devices a definite minimum operating time for the operating characteristic can be set. The definite minimum time setting should be set to provide an adequate margin between the operation of the negative phase sequence thermal protection function and external protection. The co-ordination time margin used should be in accordance with the usual practice adopted by the customer for backup protection co-ordination. For levels of negative phase sequence current that are only slightly in excess of the thermal element pick up setting , there will be a noticeable deviation
between the P340 negative phase sequence thermal protection current-time characteristic and that of the simple I22t characteristic. For this reason, a maximum negative phase sequence protection trip time setting is provided. This maximum time setting also limits the tripping time of the negative phase sequence protection for levels of unbalance where there may be uncertainty about the machines thermal withstand. A time delayed negative sequence overcurrent alarm stage is provided to give the operator early warning of an unbalanced condition that may lead to generator tripping. This can allow corrective action to be taken to reduce the unbalance in the load. The Negative Sequence element uses the current measured at the IA, IB, IC inputs on the relay. Thermal state of the machine can be viewed in the Rotor Thermal cell in the MEASUREMENTS 3 column. The thermal state can be reset by selecting Yes in the Reset Thermal cell in Measurements 3 . Alternatively the thermal state can be reset by energising DDB177 via the relay PSL. A DDB signal are also available to indicate tripping of element (DDB186). A further DDB Alarm signal is generated from the NPS thermal alarm stage (DDB128).The state of the DDB signal can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for the negative phase sequence thermal element are shown in the following table: Menu Text GROUP 1: Default Setting NPS THERMAL Enabled 0.05 In A 20 s Enabled 0.1 In A 15 15 1000 s 0.25 s 0.05 In A 2 2 500 s 0.25 s 0.03 In A 2s Disabled, Enabled 0.5 In A 60 s Disabled, Enabled 0.5 In A 40 40 2000 s 40 s 0.01 In A 0.1 0.1 10 s 0.25 s 0.01 In A 0.1 s Setting Range Min Max Step Size
I2>1 Alarm I2>1 Current Set I2>1 Time Delay I2>2 Trip I2>2 Current set I2>2 k Setting I2>2 kRESET I2>2 tMAX I2>2 tMIN
2.11.1 Setting guidelines for negative phase sequence thermal protection The alarm and trip stages of the negative phase sequence thermal protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled, within the I2>1 Alarm and I2>2 Trip cells respectively. Synchronous machines will be able to withstand a certain level of negative phase sequence stator current continuously. All synchronous machines will be assigned a continuous maximum negative phase sequence current (I2cmr per-
unit) rating by the manufacturer. For various categories of generator, minimum negative phase sequence current withstand levels have been specified by international standards, such as IEC34-1 and ANSI C50.13-1977 [1]. The IEC34-1 figures are given in Table 1. Generator type Maximum I2/In for continuous operation Maximum (I2/In)2t for operation under fault conditions, Kg 20
Salient pole: Indirectly cooled Directly cooled (inner cooled) stator and/or field Cylindrical rotor synchronous: Indirectly cooled rotor Air cooled Hydrogen cooled Directly cooled (inner cooled) rotor > 350 > 900 > 1250 350MVA 900MVA 1250MVA 1600MVA 0.08 * * 0.05 8 ** 5 5 0.1 0.1 15 10 0.08
0.05
15
* For these generators, the value of I2/In is calculated as follows:
S - 350 I2 = 0.08 - n 3 x 10 4 In
** For these generators, the value of (I2/In)2t is calculated as follows:
I2 t = 8 - 0.00545(Sn - 350) In
where S is the rated power in MVA n
Table 1 IEC34-1 Minimum negative sequence current withstand levels.

To obtain correct thermal protection, the relay thermal current setting, I2>2 Current Set , and thermal capacity setting, I2>2 k Setting , should be set as follows:
I flc In I 2 > 2 Current set = I 2 cmr I p
I flc I 2 > 2 k Setting = K g I p
Where: I 2cmr = Generator per unit I2 maximum withstand. Kg = Generator thermal capacity constant (s), see Table 1 for guidance. Iflc = Generator primary full-load current (A). Ip = CT primary current rating (A). I n = Relay rated current (A). Unless otherwise specified, the cooling time constant, I2>2 kRESET , setting should be set equal to the main time constant setting, I2>2 k Setting . A machine manufacturer may be able to advise a specific cooling time constant for the protected generator. The current threshold of the alarm stage, I2>1 Current Set , should be set below the thermal trip setting, I2>2 Current Set , to ensure that the alarm operates before tripping occurs. The alarm stage time setting, I2>1 Time Delay , must be chosen to prevent operation during system fault clearance and to ensure that unwanted alarms are not generated during normal running. A typical setting for this time delay would be 20s. To aid grading with downstream devices a definite minimum operating time for the operating characteristic can be set, I2>2 tMIN . This definite minimum time setting should be set to provide an adequate margin between the operation of the negative phase sequence thermal protection function and external protection. The co-ordination time margin used should be in accordance with the usual practice adopted by the customer for back-up protection co-ordination. A maximum operating time for the negative phase sequence thermal characteristic may be set, I2>2 tMAX . This definite time setting can be used to ensure that the thermal rating of the machine is never exceeded. 2.12 Reverse power/over power/low forward power The power protection elements of the P340 relay calculate the three phase active power based on the following formula, using the current measured at the IA, IB, IC inputs on the relay.
P = VaIa cos a + VbIb cos b + VcIc cos c Two stages of power protection are provided, these can be independently selected as either reverse power, over power, low forward power or disabled, operation in each mode is described in the following sections. The power elements may be selectively disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be inhibited when the protected machines CB is open, this will prevent maloperation and nuisance flagging of any stage selected to operate as low forward power.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage (Starts: DDB274, DDB275, Trips: DDB237, 238). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for the Power elements are shown in the following table:
Menu Text GROUP 1: -P>1 Setting
Default Setting POWER Reverse 5 x In W

(Vn=100/120V)
Step Size
Power1 Function
Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over 4 x In W

(Vn=100/120V)
40 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
16 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
160 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
P<1 Setting
5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
4 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
40 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
16 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
160 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
P>1 Setting
5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
4 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
300 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
16 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
1200 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
Power1 Time Delay Power1 DO Timer P1 Poledead Inh Power2 Function -P>2 Setting
5s 0s Enabled Low Forward 5 x In W

(Vn=100/120V)
0s 0s
100 s 10 s Enabled, Disabled
0.1 s 0.1 s
Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over 4 x In W

(Vn=100/120V)
40 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
16 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
160 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
P<2 Setting
5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
4 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
40 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
16 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
160 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
P>2 Setting
5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
4 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
300 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
16 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
1200 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
Power2 Time Delay Power2 DO Timer P2 Poledead Inh
5s 0s Enabled
0s 0s
100 s 10 s Enabled, Disabled
0.1 s 0.1 s
2.12.1 Low forward power protection function When the CB connecting the generator to the system is tripped, the electrical load on the generator is cut. This could lead to generator over-speed if the mechanical input power is not reduced quickly. Large turbo-alternators, with
low-inertia rotor designs, do not have a high over speed tolerance. Trapped steam in the turbine, downstream of a valve that has just closed, can rapidly lead to over speed. To reduce the risk of over speed damage to such sets, it is sometimes chosen to interlock non-urgent tripping of the generator breaker and the excitation system with a low forward power check. This ensures that the generator set circuit breaker is opened only when the output power is sufficiently low that over speeding is unlikely. The delay in electrical tripping, until prime mover input power has been removed, may be deemed acceptable for non-urgent protection trips; eg. stator earth fault protection for a high impedance earthed generator. For urgent trips, eg. stator current differential protection the low forward power interlock should not be used. With the low probability of urgent trips, the risk of over speed and possible consequences must be accepted. The low forward power protection can be arranged to interlock non-urgent protection tripping using the relay scheme logic. It can also be arranged to provide a contact for external interlocking of manual tripping, if desired. To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a low forward power protection element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is opened via poledead logic. 2.12.1.1Low forward power setting guideline Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a low forward power stage by selecting the Power1 Function or Power2 Function cell to Low Forward. When required, the threshold setting of the low forward power protection function, P<1 Setting or P<2 Setting , should be less than 50% of the power level that could result in a dangerous over speed transient on loss of electrical loading. The generator set manufacturer should be consulted for a rating for the protected machine. The time delay associated with the low forward power protection function, Power1 TimeDelay or Power2 TimeDelay , could be set to zero. However, some delay is desirable so that permission for a non-urgent electrical trip is not given in the event of power fluctuations arising from sudden steam valve/ throttle closure. A typical time delay for this reason is 2s. The delay on reset timer, Power1 DO Timer or Power2 DO Timer , would normally be set to zero when selected to operate low forward power elements. To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a low forward power protection element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is open via poledead logic. This is controlled by setting the power protection inhibit cells, P1 Poledead Inh or P2 Poledead Inh , to Enabled. 2.12.2 Reverse power protection function A generator is expected to supply power to the connected system in normal operation. If the generator prime mover fails, a generator that is connected in parallel with another source of electrical supply will begin to motor. This reversal of power flow due to loss of prime mover can be detected by the reverse power element. The consequences of generator motoring and the level of power drawn from the power system will be dependent on the type of prime mover. Typical levels of
motoring power and possible motoring damage that could occur for various types of generating plant are given in the following table. Prime Mover Diesel Engine Motoring Power (Percentage rating) 5% - 25% Possible Damage Risk of fire or explosion from unburned fuel
Motoring level depends on compression ratio and cylinder bore stiffness. Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss and risk of damage. Gas Turbine 10% - 15% (Split-shaft) >50% (Single-shaft) Compressor load on single shaft machines leads to a high motoring power compared to split-shaft machines. Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss or damage. Hydraulic Turbines 0.2 - >2% Blade and runner cavitation (Blades out of water) may occur with a long period of motoring >2.0% (Blades in water) With some gear-driven sets, damage may arise due to reverse torque on gear teeth.
Power is low when blades are above tail-race water level. Hydraulic flow detection devices are often the main means of detecting loss of drive. Automatic disconnection is recommended for unattended operation. Steam Turbines 0.5% - 3% (Condensing sets) 3% - 6% (Non-condensing sets) Thermal stress damage may be inflicted on low-pressure turbine blades when steam flow is not available to dissipate windage losses.
Damage may occur rapidly with non-condensing sets or when vacuum is lost with condensing sets. Reverse power protection may be used as a secondary method of detection and might only be used to raise an alarm. Table showing motoring power and possible damage for various types of prime mover. In some applications, the level of reverse power in the case of prime mover failure may fluctuate. This may be the case for a failed diesel engine. To prevent cyclic initiation and reset of the main trip timer, and consequent failure to trip, an adjustable reset time delay is provided. This delay would need to be set longer than the period for which the reverse power could fall below the power setting ( P<1 Setting ). This setting needs to be taken into account when setting the main trip time delay. It should also be noted that a delay on reset in excess of half the period of any system power swings could result in operation of the reverse power protection during swings.
Reverse power protection may also be used to interlock the opening of the generator set circuit breaker for non-urgent tripping, as discussed in 2.12.1. Reverse power interlocks are preferred over low forward power interlocks by some utilities. 2.12.2.1Reverse power setting guideline Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a reverse power stage by selecting the Power1 Function or Power2 Function cell to Reverse. The power threshold setting of the reverse power protection, -P>1 Setting or P>2 Setting , should be less than 50% of the motoring power, typical values for the level of reverse power for generators are given in previous table. The reverse power protection function should be time-delayed to prevent false trips or alarms being given during power system disturbances or following synchronisation. A time delay setting, Power1 TimeDelay or Power2 TimeDelay of 5s should be applied typically. The delay on reset timer, Power1 DO Timer or Power2 DO Timer , would normally be set to zero. When settings of greater than zero are used for the reset time delay, the pick up time delay setting may need to be increased to ensure that false tripping does not result in the event of a stable power swinging event. An additional more sensitive reverse power relay may be required in the case of large steam turbines of hydro machines, where the minimum setting provided by the P340 relay is too high. Such dedicated relays can be fed from measurement class CTs providing more accurate determination of low levels of power. An external relay can be integrated into the overall protection/ monitoring/recording scheme via the P340 programmable scheme logic. 2.12.3 Over power protection The overpower protection can be used as overload indication, as a back-up protection for failure of governor and control equipment, and would be set above the maximum power rating of the machine. 2.12.3.1Over power setting guideline Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as an over power stage by selecting the Power1 Function or Power2 Function cell to Over. The power threshold setting of the over power protection, P>1 Setting or P2 Setting , should be set greater than the machine full load rated power. A time delay setting, Power1 TimeDelay or Power2 TimeDelay should be applied. The delay on reset timer, Power1 DO Timer or Power2 DO Timer , would normally be set to zero. 2.13 Stator earth fault protection function Low voltage generators will be solidly earthed, however to limit the damage that can be caused due to earth faults, it is common for HV generators to be connected to earth via an impedance. This impedance may be fitted on the secondary side of a distribution transformer earthing arrangement. The earthing impedance is generally chosen to limit earth fault current to full load current or less.
There is a limit on the percentage of winding that can be protected by a stator earth fault element. For earth faults close to the generator neutral, the driving voltage will be low, and hence the value of fault current will be severely reduced. In practice, approximately 95% of the stator winding can be protected. For faults in the last 5% of the winding, the earth fault current is so low that it cannot be detected by this type of earth fault protection. In most applications this limitation is accepted as the chances of an earth fault occurring in the last 5% of the winding, where the voltage to earth is low, is small. The percentage of winding covered by the earth fault protection can be calculated as shown below, with reference to Figure 12.
V
x Is R If = xV/R x min = Is R/V % covered = (1 - x min ) x 100% If
Figure 12:
Effective coverage of stator earth fault protection
A two stage non-directional earth fault element is provided. The first stage has an inverse time or definite time delay characteristic and can incorporate a reset time delay to improve detection of intermittent faults. The second stage has a definite time characteristic which can be set to 0s to provide instantaneous operation. Where impedance or distribution transformer earthing is used the second stage of protection may be used to detect flashover of the earthing impedance. The second stage may also be used to provide instantaneous protection where grading with system protection is not required. See setting guidelines for more details. Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB146, DDB147). This allows the earth fault protection to be integrated into busbar protection schemes as shown in Section 2.24, or can be used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each stage of protection, (Starts:DDB292, DDB293, Trips:- DDB204, DDB205). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
The Stator Earth Fault element is powered from the IN CT input on the relay. This input should be supplied from a CT fitted into the generator earth path so that the element provides earth fault protection for the generator and back-up protection for system faults. Alternatively, the element may be supplied from a CT fitted on the secondary side of a distribution transformer earthing system. Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following table: Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min Group 1 Earth fault IN>1 Function Disabled Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse 0.02 x In A 0s 0.025 0.5 DT, Inverse 0s 0.02 x In A 0s 100 s Disabled, DT 10 x In A 200 s 4 x In A 200 s 1.2 15 0.01 x In A 0.01 s 0.025 1 N/A 0.01 s N/A 0.01 x In A 0.01 s Max Step Size
IN>1 Current IN>1 Time Delay IN>1 TMS IN>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Function IN>2 Current Set IN>2 Time Delay
0.1 x In A 1s 1 7 DT 0s DT 0.45 x In A 0s
For further details regarding the inverse time characteristics refer to the Overcurrent Protection, Section 2.4. 2.13.1 Setting guidelines for stator earth fault potection The first stage of earth fault protection can be selected by setting IN>1 Function to any of the inverse or DT settings. The first stage is disabled if IN>1 Function is set to Disabled. The second stage of earth fault protection can be selected by setting IN>2 Function to Enabled. The second stage is disabled if IN>2 Function is set to Disabled. For a directly connected machine the stator earth fault protection must coordinate with any downstream earth fault protections. The first stage current setting, IN>1 Current , should typically be set to less than 33% of the machine earth fault contribution or full load current, whichever is lower. The time delay characteristic of the element (selected via IN>1 Function and IN>1 Time Delay , IN>1 TMS or IN>1 Time Dial ) should be set to time grade with any downstream earth fault protection. Where the element is required to protect 95% of the generator winding a current setting of 5% of the limited earth fault current should be used.
Where impedance or distribution transformer earthing is used the second stage may be used to detect flashover of the earthing impedance. In such a case the second stage current setting, IN>2 Current , could be set to approximately 150% of the limited earth fault current and the time delay, IN>2 Time Delay , would be set to 0s, to provide instantaneous operation. For a machine connected to the system via a step-up transformer there is no need to grade the stator earth fault element with system earth fault protections. In this case the first stage should be set to 5% of the limited earth fault current to provide protection for 95% of the machine winding. The time delay characteristic of the stage should grade with VT fuses for VT earth faults. A transient generator earth fault current may also occur for a HV earth fault due to transformer inter-winding capacitance. Correct grading under these conditions can be provided by using a definite time delay of between 0.5-3s. Experience has shown that it is possible to apply an instantaneous stator earth fault element on a indirectly connected machine if a current setting of 10% of the limited earth fault current is used. Therefore the second stage can be set to give this instantaneous protection. 2.14 Residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection function On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to earth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors at 120 to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs on the primary system this balance is upset and a residual voltage is produced. This could be measured, for example, at the secondary terminals of a voltage transformer having a broken delta secondary connection. Hence, a residual voltage measuring relay can be used to offer earth fault protection on such a system. Note that this condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth which is commonly referred to as neutral voltage displacement or NVD. Alternatively, if the system is impedance or distribution transformer earthed, the neutral displacement voltage can be measured directly in the earth path via a single phase VT. This type of protection can be used to provide earth fault protection irrespective of whether the generator is earthed or not, and irrespective of the form of earthing and earth fault current level. For faults close to the generator neutral the resulting residual voltage will be small. Therefore, as with stator earth fault protection, only 95% of the stator winding can be reliably protected. It should be noted that where residual overvoltage protection is applied to a directly connected generator, such a voltage will be generated for an earth fault occurring anywhere on that section of the system and hence the NVD protection must co-ordinate with other earth fault protections. The neutral voltage displacement protection function of the P340 relay consists of two stages with adjustable time delays. Two stages are included for the element to account for applications which require both alarm and trip stages, for example, an insulated system. It is common in such a case for the system to have been designed to withstand the associated healthy phase overvoltages for a number of hours following an earth fault. In such applications, an alarm is generated soon after the condition is detected, which serves to indicate the presence of an earth fault on the system.
This gives time for system operators to locate and isolate the fault. The second stage of the protection can issue a trip signal if the fault condition persists. A dedicated voltage input is provided for this protection function, this may be used to measure the residual voltage supplied from either an open delta connected VT or the voltage measured on the secondary side of a distribution transformer earth connection, as shown in Figure 13. Alternatively, the residual voltage may be derived internally from the three phase to neutral voltage measurements. Where derived measurement is used the 3 phase to neutral voltage must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VTs. These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay when residual voltage is required to be derived from the phase to neutral voltage measurement. The residual voltage signal also provides a polarising voltage signal for the sensitive directional earth fault protection function.
2 1 Va Vb Vc Vn
1 Derived from phase neutral voltages 2 Measured from earth impedance 3 Measured from broken delta VT
MiCOM P343
Figure 13: Alternative relay connections for residual overvoltage/NVD protection

Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB156, DDB157), this can be used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each stage of protection, (Starts:- DDB256, DDB257, Trips:- DDB213, DDB214). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text
Default Setting Min
Setting Range Max Measured, Derived 0.02 x In A 1V

(Vn=100/120V)
Step Size
GROUP 1 RESIDUAL O/V NVD VN Input VN>1 Function VN>1 Voltage Set Measured DT 5V
(Vn=100/120V)
4 x In A 50V
(Vn=100/120V)
0.01 x In A 1V
(Vn=100/ 120V)
20 V
(Vn=400/440V)
4V
(Vn=400/440V)
200V
(Vn=400/440V)
5V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
VN>1 Time Delay VN>1 TMS VN>1 tRESET VN>2 Status VN>2 Voltage Set
1s 1 0s DT 5V
(Vn=100/120V)
0s 0.5 0s
100 s 100 100 s Disabled or DT
0.01 s 0.5 0.01 s
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
50V
(Vn=100/120V)
1V
(Vn=100/ 120V)
20 V
(Vn=400/440V)
4V
(Vn=400/440V)
200V
(Vn=400/440V)
5V
(Vn=400/ 440V)
VN>2 Time Delay
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t = K x 40 / (1 - M) Where; K = Time Multiplier Setting ( VN>1 TMS ) t = Operating Time in Seconds M =Measured Residual Voltage / Relay Setting Voltage ( VN>1 Voltage Set ) 2.14.1 Setting guidelines for residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (inverse time operating characteristic), DT (definite time operating characteristic) or Disabled, within the VN>1 Function cell. Stage 2 operates with a definite time characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the VN>2 Status cell. The time delay.( VN>1 TMS - for IDMT curve; V>1 Time Delay , V>2 Time Delay - for definite time) should be selected in accordance with normal relay co-ordination
procedures to ensure correct discrimination for system faults. The residual overvoltage protection can be set to operate from the voltage measured at the Vn input VT terminals or the residual voltage derived from the phase-neutral voltage inputs as selected by VN Input . For a directly connected machine the neutral voltage displacement protection must co-ordinate with any downstream earth fault protections. To ensure coordination the voltage setting of the neutral voltage displacement protection function should be set higher than the effective setting of current operated earth fault protection in the same earth fault zone. The effective voltage setting of a current operated earth fault protection may be established from the following equations: Veff = (Ipoc x Ze) / (1/3 x V1/V2) Veff = (Ipoc x Ze) / (V1/V2) where: Veff = effective voltage setting of current operated protection Ipoc = primary operating current of current operated protection Ze = earthing impedance
V1
for an open delta VT for a single phase star point VT
/V2 = VT turns ratio
It must also be ensured that the voltage setting of the element is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. A typical setting for residual overvoltage protection is 5V. The second stage of protection can be used as an alarm stage on unearthed or very high impedance earthed systems where the system can be operated for an appreciable time under an earth fault condition. Where the generator is connected to the system via a transformer, co-ordination with system earth fault protections is not required. In these applications the NVD voltage setting should typically be set to 5% of rated voltage. This will provide protection for 95% of the stator winding. 2.15 Sensitive earth fault protection function If a generator is earthed through a high impedance, or is subject to high ground fault resistance, the earth fault level will be severely limited. Consequently, the applied earth fault protection requires both an appropriate characteristic and a suitably sensitive setting range in order to be effective. A separate sensitive earth fault element is provided within the P340 relay for this purpose, this has a dedicated CT input allowing very low current setting thresholds to be used. An alternative use for the sensitive earth fault input is on a multiple earthed system where it is advantageous to apply a directional earth fault relay at the machine terminals. The directional relay, operating for current flowing into the machine, will be stable for external faults but can operate quickly for generator faults when fault current is fed from the system. Where several machines are connected in parallel, it is common for only one machine to be earthed at any time. This prevents the flow of third harmonic currents which could overheat the machine. This may be the only earth connection for this part of the system. Non directional earth fault protection could be applied at the terminals of the unearthed machines in such cases
since an unearthed generator cannot source earth fault current. However, as any of the machines can be earthed, it is prudent to apply directional protection at the terminals of all the machines. There is also a risk that transient spill current can cause operation of a non directional, terminal fed, earth fault relay for an external phase fault, hence directional elements have an added degree of security. When applied in this way the directional earth fault elements will operate for faults on the unearthed machines but not the earthed machine. Therefore, additional stator earth fault or residual overvoltage/NVD protection should be used to protect the earthed machine. Such a scheme will provide stable, fast, earth fault protection for all machines, no matter which generator is earthed. A single stage definite time sensitive earth fault protection element is provided in the P340 relay, this element can be set to operate with a directional characteristic when required. When directional earth Fault protection is required the operating current should be derived from either a core balanced CT or the residual connection of 3 phase CTs at the terminals of the machine. Direction of the earth fault current for this element is determined with reference to the polarising signal, the residual voltage. The polarising signal is taken from the residual overvoltage/NVD protection input or derived from the 3 phaseneutral voltage inputs on the relay. A polarising voltage threshold is also provided. The element cannot operate unless voltage exceeds this threshold. This helps to restrain the element during phase/phase faults when transient CT saturation produces spill current in the residual connection of the phase CTs. No residual voltage will be present during such non earth fault conditions hence the DEF element cannot operate. The element will therefore be enabled only during genuine earth fault conditions when significant residual voltage will be present. To prevent the element from mal-operating due to VT fuse failure the element can be blocked from the VT supervision logic. Where Petersen Coil earthing is used, users may wish to use Wattmetric Directional Earth Fault protection. Settings to enable the element to operate as a wattmetric element are also provided. The Sensitive Earth Fault protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB150). This allows the protection to be integrated into busbar protection schemes as shown in Section 2.24, or can be used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of the protection, (Start:- DDB296, Trips:- DDB209). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for the Sensitive Earth Fault element are shown in the following table:
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 56 of 103 Setting Range Min Max Step Size
Menu Text
Default Setting
Group 1 SEF/REF Protection SEF/REF Options ISEF>1 Function SEF SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF, Lo Z REF, Lo Z REF + SEF, Lo Z REF + Watt Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev 0.002 In A 0s 0.1 In A 200 s 0.00025 In A 0.01 s
DT
ISEF>1 Direction ISEF>1 Current ISEF>1 Delay ISEF> Func Link ISEF DIRECTIONAL ISEF> Char Angle ISEF> VNpol Input ISEF> Vnpol Set
Non-Directional 0.05 In A 1s 1
Bit 0 - Block ISEF> from VTS Sub Heading
90 Measured 5V
(Vn=100/120V)
-95
95 Measured, Derived
0.5 V
(Vn=100/120V)
22 V
(Vn=100/120V)
0.5 V
(Vn=100/120V)
20 V
(Vn=400/440V)
2V
(Vn=400/440V)
88 V
(Vn=400/440V)
2V
(Vn=400/440V)
WATTMETRIC SEF PN> Setting 9 x In W

(Vn=100/120V)
Sub Heading 0W 20 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.05 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
36 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
80 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
0.2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V)
For further details regarding the inverse time characteristics refer to the Overcurrent Protection, Section 2.4. 2.15.1 Setting guidelines for sensitive earth fault protection The operating function of the sensitive earth fault protection can be selected by setting SEF/REF Options cell. The SEF protection is selected by setting ISEF>1 Function to Enabled. To provide sensitive earth fault or sensitive directional earth fault protection the SEF/REF Options cell should be set to SEF. For wattmetric earth fault protection SEF/REF Options cell should be set
to Wattmetric. The other options for SEF/REF Options relate to restricted earth fault protection, for more details see Section 2.16. The directionality of the element is selected in the ISEF> Direction setting. If ISEF> Direction is set to Directional Fwd the element will operate with a directional characteristic and will operate when current flows in the forward direction, ie. when current flows into the machine with the relay connected as shown in the standard relay connection diagram. If ISEF> Direction is set to Directional Rev the element will operate with a directional characteristic and will operate when current flows in the opposite direction, ie. current flow out of the machine into the system. If ISEF> Direction is set to Non-Directional the element will operate as a simple overcurrent element. If either of the directional options are chosen additional cells to select the characteristic angle of the directional characteristic and polarising voltage threshold will become visible. The operating current threshold of the Sensitive Earth Fault protection function, ISEF>1 Current , should be set to give a primary operating current down to 5% or less of the minimum earth fault current contribution to a generator terminal fault. The directional element characteristic angle setting, ISEF> Char Angle , should be set to match as closely as possible the angle of zero sequence source impedance behind the relaying point. If this impedance is dominated by an earthing resistor, for example, the angle setting would be set to 0 . On insulated or very high impedance earthed systems the earth fault current measured by a SDEF element is predominantly capacitive hence the RCA should be set to -90 . The polarising voltage threshold setting, ISEF> VNpol Set , should be chosen to give a sensitivity equivalent to that of the operating current threshold. This current level can be translated into a residual voltage as described for the residual overvoltage protection in Section 2.14. When the element is set as a non directional element the definite time delay setting ISEF>1 Delay should be set to co-ordinate with downstream devices that may operate for external earth faults. For an indirectly connected generator the SEF element should co-ordinate with the measurement VT fuses, to prevent operation for VT faults. For directional applications when the element is fed from the residual connection of the phase CTs a short time delay is desirable to ensure stability for external earth faults or phase/phase faults. A time delay of 0.5s will be sufficient to provide stability in the majority of applications. Where a dedicated core balance CT is used for directional applications an instantaneous setting may be used. 2.16 Restricted earth fault protection Earth faults occurring on a machine winding or terminal may be of limited magnitude, either due to the impedance present in the earth path or by the percentage of stator winding that is involved in the fault. As stated in Section 2.13, it is common to apply stator earth fault protection fed from a single CT in the machine earth connection - this can provide time delayed protection for a stator winding or terminal fault. On larger machines, typically >2MW, where phase CTs can be fitted to both neutral end and terminal ends of the stator winding, phase differential protection may be fitted. For small machines, however, only one set of phase CTs may be available making phase differential protection impractical. For smaller generators earth fault differential protection
can be applied to provide instantaneous tripping for any stator or terminal earth fault. In application the operating zone of earth fault differential protection is restricted to faults within the boundaries of the CTs supplying the relay, hence this type of element is referred to as restricted earth fault protection. When applying differential protection such as REF, some suitable means must be employed to give the protection stability under external fault conditions, thus ensuring that relay operation only occurs for faults on the transformer winding / connections. Two methods are commonly used; percentage bias or high impedance. The biasing technique operates by measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the relay sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the relay circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current through the relay. The REF protection in the P340 relays may be configured to operate as either a high impedance differential or a low impedance biased differential element. The following sections describe the application of the relay in each mode. Note that the high impedance REF element of the relay shares the same CT input as the SEF protection. Hence, only one of these elements may be selected. A DDB signals are also available to indicate the tripping of the REF protection, (DDB208). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. The REF settings can be found in the SEF/REF PROTN column and are shown below:Menu Text GROUP 1: Default Setting SEF/REF PROT'N SEF SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF, Lo Z REF, Lo Z REF + SEF, Lo Z REF + Watt Sub Heading 0% 0% 0.2 In A 1 In A 0.2 In A 0 0 0.05 In A 0.1 In A 0.05 In A 20% 150% 1 In A 1.5 In A 1 In A 1% 1% 0.01 In A 0.01 In A 0.01 In A Setting Range Min SEF/REF Options REF PROTECTION IREF> k1 IREF> k2 IREF> Is1 IREF> Is2 IREF> Is Max Step Size
Note that CT requirements for REF protection are included in Section 6 2.16.1 Low impedance biased differential REF protection In a biased differential relay, the through current is measured and used to increase the setting of the differential element. For heavy through faults, one CT in the scheme can be expected to become more saturated than the other and hence differential current can be produced. However, biasing will increase the relay setting such that the resulting differential current is insufficient to cause
operation of the relay. Figures 14 and 15 show the appropriate relay connections and operating characteristic for the P340 relay applied for biased REF protection, respectively:-
Ia Ib Ic In
MiCOM P343
Figure 14:
Relay connections for biased REF protection
I DIFF Operate k2
IS1
k1 IS2
Restrain
I BIAS
Figure 15:
Biased REF protection operating characteristic
As can be seen in Figure 14, the three line CTs are connected to the three phase CTs in the normal manner. The neutral CT is then connected to the stator earth fault CT input. These currents are then used internally to derive both a bias and a differential current quantity for use by the low impedance biased
differential REF protection. The advantage of this method of connection is that the line and neutral CTs are not differentially connected and so the neutral CT can also be used to drive the stator earth fault protection. Also, no external equipment such as stabilising resistors or metrosils are required, unlike the case with high impedance protection. The formula used by the relay to calculate the required bias quantity is therefore as follows:Ibias = {(Highest of Ia, Ib or Ic) + (Ineutral x Scaling Factor)} / 2 The reason for the scaling factor included on the neutral current is explained by referring to Figure 16:Phase CT ratio 1000/1
Phase A Phase B Phase C
Neutral CT ratio 200/1
IA IB IC IN IBIAS = (highest of IA , IB , IC ) + ( I N x scaling factor)

2 Where the scaling factor = Neutral CT ratio Phase CT ratio = 200 1000 = 0.2 MiCOM P343
IDIFF = IA + IB + IC + (scaling factor x I N )

Figure 16: Neutral scaling bor biased REF protection
Where it is required that the neutral CT also drives the stator earth fault protection element, it may be a requirement that the neutral CT has a lower ratio than the line CTs in order to provide better earth fault sensitivity. The relay automatically scales the level of neutral current used in the bias calculation by a factor equal to the ratio of the neutral to line CT primary ratings to compensate for any mismatch. 2.16.1.1Setting guidelines for low impedance biased REF protection To select low impedance biased REF protection SEF/REF Option should be selected to Lo Z REF. If REF protection is required to operate alongside sensitive earth fault protection, SEF/REF Option should be selected to Lo Z REF + SEF or Lo Z REF + Wattmet (if Wattmetric earth fault protection is required). As can be seen from Figure 15, two bias settings are provided in the REF characteristic of the P340. The IREF> k1 level of bias is applied up to through currents of IREF> Is2 , which is normally set to the rated current of the machine. IREF> k1 should normally be set to 0% to give optimum sensitivity for internal faults. However, if any differential spill current is present under normal conditions due to CT mismatch, then IREF> k1 may be increased accordingly, to compensate. IREF> k2 bias is applied for through currents above IREF> Is2 and may typically be set to 150% to ensure adequate restraint for external faults. The neutral current scaling factor which automatically compensates for differences between neutral and phase CT ratios relies upon the relay having been programmed with the correct CT ratios. It must therefore be ensured that these CT ratios are entered into the relay, in the CT RATIOS menu, in order for the scheme to operate correctly. The differential current setting IREF> Is1 should typically be set to 5% of the limited earth fault current level. 2.16.2 High impedance restricted earth fault protection The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 17. If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary current produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If CT magnetising impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum voltage across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault current multiplied by the connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2). The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through the relay is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula shown in Figure 17.
Healthy CT Protected zone Zm R CT1 R L1 R st R L2 R If R L3
Saturated CT
R CT2
V s R L4
Voltage across relay circuit V s = KI f (R CT + 2R L ) - where K = 0.7 Stabilising resistor,R st , limits spill current to Is (relay setting) R st = Vs - RR Is Where R R = relay burden
Figure 17:
Principle of high impedance differential protection
The necessary relay connections for high impedance REF are shown in Figure 18:
RST = Stabilising resistor NLR = Non-linear resistance (Metrosil) NLR RST
MiCOM P343
I SEF
Figure 18:
Relay connections for high impedance REF protection
As can be seen from Figure 18, the high impedance protection uses an external differential connection between the line CTs and neutral CT. The SEF input is then connected to the differential circuit with a stabilising resistor in series. 2.16.2.1Setting guidelines for high impedance REF protection From the Sens E/F Options cell, Hi Z REF must be selected to enable High Impedance REF protection. The only setting cell then visible is IREF> Is , which may be programmed with the required differential current setting. This would typically be set to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the minimum earth fault level for a resistance earthed system or between 10 and 60% of rated current for a solidly earthed system. The primary operating current (Iop) will be a function of the current transformer ratio, the relay operating current ( IREF> Is ), the number of current transformers in parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of each current transformer (Ie) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in three ways: i. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to achieve a specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current.
Ie <
1 I op REF > s1 x I I n CT ratio
ii. To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current.
I op IREF > Is1< n I e CT ratio

iii. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
I op = (CT ratio ) x (IREF > Is1+ nI e )

In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current transformers that are used, a current setting IREF> Is must be selected for the high impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting is a function of the required stability voltage setting (VS) and the relay current setting IREF> Is .
R ST =
See Figure 17 for reference.
VS IREF > Is1
Note: The above equation assumes negligivle relay impedance. The stabilising resistor supplied is continuously adjustable up to its maximum declared resistance.
USE OF METROSIL
NON-LINEAR RESISTORS
Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3000V peak. The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current transformer saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a function of maximum internal fault secondary current, the current transformer ratio, the current transformer secondary winding resistance , the current transformer lead resistance to the common point, the relay lead resistance and the stabilising resistor value.
VP = 2 2 VK (Vf - VK )
Vf = I f (R CT + 2RL + R ST )
where: Vp = peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions. Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage. Vf = maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur. If = maximum internal secondary fault current. Rct = current transformer secondary winding resistance. RL = maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay. RST = relay stabilising resistor. When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils should be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages. Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating characteristics follow the expression:
V = CI 0.25
where V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) C = constant of the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) I = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) . With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows;
Vs(rms) x 2 I (rms) = 0.52 C
where Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil. This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted. For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor ( metrosil ), its characteristic should be such that it complies with the following requirements: i. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) current should be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA r.m.s. for 1A current transformers and approximately 100mA r.m.s. for 5A current transformers. ii. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor ( metrosil ) should limit the voltage to 1500V r.m.s. or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V r.m.s., so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated. The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc. Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions:1. 2. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CTs are as shown in the following table: Relay Voltage Setting
Up to 125V rms 125 to 300V rms
Nominal Characteristic C
450 900
Recommended
Single Pole Relay 600A/S1/S256 600A/S1/S1088
Metrosil Type
Triple Pole Relay 600A/S3/1/S802 600A/S3/1/S1195
0.25 0.25
Note: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer Metrosil Units for Relays with a 5 Amp CT These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 100mA rms (the actual maxium currents passed by the units shown below their type description. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
2.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole relays are as shown in the following table:
Secondary internal fault current Amps rms Up to 200V rms
600A/S1/S1213 50A C = 540/640 35mA rms
Recommended METROSIL Type Relay Voltage Setting 250V rms

600A/S1/S1214 C = 670/800 40mA rms
275V rms
600A/S1/S1214 C =670/800 50mA rms
300V rms
600A/S1/S1223 C = 740/870* 50mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196 100A C = 470/540 70mA rms C = 570/670 75mA rms C =570/670 100mA rms C =620/740* 100mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1219 600A/S3/P/S1220 600A/S3/P/S1221 600A/S3/P/S1222 150A C = 430/500 100mA rms C = 520/620 100mA rms C = 570/670** 100mA rms C =620/740*** 100mA rm
Note: *2400V peak
**2200V peak
***2600V peak
In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control for detailed applications. Notes: 1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated for each other. To order these units please specify "Triple pole Metrosil type", followed by the single pole type reference. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be supplied if required.
2.
For further advice and guidance on selecting METROSILS please contact the Applications department at ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control. 2.17 100% stator earth fault protection As stated in Sections 2.13 and 2.14, standard residual current or residual overvoltage protection elements can provide earth fault protection for 95% of the generator stator winding. Earth faults in the final 5% of the winding will result in such a low fault current or such a small imbalance in voltage that conventional protection cannot be relied upon to detect the fault. In most applications this limitation is accepted due to the low probability of a fault occurring in the 5% of the stator winding closest to the star point, where the voltage to earth is lowest. Most generators will produce third harmonic voltage to some degree. The third harmonic voltage measured at the neutral of the machine will drop for faults close to the neutral. To detect faults in the last 5% of the generator winding, the P343 relay is provided with a third harmonic undervoltage element. This, together with the residual overvoltage or stator earth fault protection elements, will provide protection for faults over the complete winding.
A normal level of third harmonic voltage of 1% is sufficient to ensure that third harmonic undervoltage and residual overvoltage protection functions will overlap hence providing 100% coverage for earth faults on the stator winding. In general, third harmonic undervoltage protection alone can provide coverage for faults on 30% of the generator winding. The element operates from the same input as the neutral voltage displacement protection and must be supplied from a VT connected in the generator earth connection as shown in Figure 19.
Vn MiCOM P343
Figure 19:
Connections for 3rd harmonic undervoltage 100% stator earth fault protection
DDB signals are available to indicate the start and trip of the protection, (Start:DDB300, Trip:- DDB178). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Interlocking may be required to prevent false operation during certain conditions. For example, some machines do not produce third harmonic voltage until they are loaded. In this case, one stage of the overcurrent protection element or the undercurrent element could be used to detect load current and this could be gated, via the relay programmable scheme logic, with the third harmonic undervoltage element to prevent false tripping under no load conditions. A terminal voltage check is also used to supervise this function to prevent operation when the machine is dead. Setting ranges for the 100% stator earth fault third harmonic undervoltage protection element are shown in the following table:
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 68 of 103 Setting Range Min Max Enabled, Disabled 0.3V 1.2V 0s 30V 120V 20V 80V 100 s 120V 480V 0.1V 0.4V 0.01 s 1V 4V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Menu Text GROUP 1:
Default Setting 100% EF Enabled 1V

(Vn=100/120V)
Step Size
100% St EF Status 100% St EF VN3H<
4V
(Vn=400/440V)
100% St EF Delay 100% St EF V<Inh
0s 80V
(Vn=100/120V)
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
320V
(Vn=400/440V)
2.17.1 Setting guidelines for 100% stator earth fault protection The 100% stator earth fault protection element can be selected by setting the 100% St EF Status cell to Enabled. The third harmonic undervoltage threshold, 100% St EF VN3H< , must be set below the level of third harmonic voltage present under normal conditions. This voltage can be determined by viewing the VN 3rd Harmonic cell in the MEASUREMENTS 3 menu. A typical value for this threshold could be 0.5V. A time delay for the element can be set in the 100% St EF Delay cell. The terminal voltage interlock threshold, used to prevent operation of the element when the machine is not running, 100% St EF V<Inh , should typically be set to 80% of machine rated voltage. NOTE: Other earth fault protection (residual overvoltage or current operated stator earth fault protection) must also be enabled to provide coverage for earth faults across the complete stator winding. 2.18 Overfluxing protection Overfluxing or overexcitation of a generator, or transformer connected to the terminals of a generator, can occur if the ratio of voltage to frequency exceeds certain limits. High voltage or low frequency, causing a rise in the V/Hz ratio, will produce high flux densities in the magnetic core of the machine or transformer. This could cause the core of the generator or transformer to saturate and stray flux to be induced in un-laminated components that have not been designed to carry flux. The resulting eddy currents in solid components (e.g. core bolts and clamps) and end of core laminations can cause rapid overheating and damage. Overfluxing is most likely to occur during machine start up or shut down whilst the generator is not connected to the system. Failures in the automatic control of the excitation system, or errors in the manual control of the machine field circuit, could allow excessive voltage to be generated. It is also possible for overfluxing to occur during parallel operation when the generator has been synchronised with the local supply network. Sudden loss of load could cause an overvoltage condition, in such circumstances, if the generator excitation system does not respond correctly.
The P342/343 relays provide a two stage overfluxing element. The element measures the ratio of voltage to frequency, V/Hz, and will operate when this ratio exceeds the setting. One stage can be set to operate with a definite time or inverse time delay, this stage can be used to provide the protection trip output. The other stage has a definite time delay characteristic and can be used as an alarm stage to indicate unhealthy conditions before damage has occurred to the machine. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of the protection, (Start:- DDB324, Trip:- DDB191). A further DDB Alarm signal is generated from the overfluxing alarm stage (DDB128). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Setting ranges for the Overfluxing protection element are shown in the following table: Menu Text Group 1 Default Setting Volts/Hz Enabled 2.31 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V)
Step Size
V/f Alarm Status V/f Alarm Set
Enabled, Disabled 1.5 V/Hz

(Vn=100/120V)
3.5 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V)
0.01 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V)
9.24 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V)
6 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V)
14 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V)
0.04 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V)
V/f Alarm Delay V/f Trip Func V/f Trip Setting
0s DT 2.42 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V)
0s 1.5 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V)
100 s Disabled, DT, IDMT 3.5 V/Hz

(Vn=100/120V)
0.01 s 0.01 V/Hz

(Vn=100/120V)
9.24 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V)
6 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V)
14 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V)
0.04 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V)
V/f Trip TMS V/f Trip Delay
1 1s
1 0s
63 100 s
1 0.01 s
The inverse time characteristic has the following formula:
t = 0.8 + Where M =
0.18 + TMS (M - 1)2
V/f (V/f Trip Setting )
V = measured voltage f = measured frequency
2.18.1 Setting guidelines for overfluxing protection The overfluxing protection element trip stage can be selected by setting the V/f Trip Func cell to the required time delay characteristic; DT for definite time operation, IDMT, for inverse time operation. The overfluxing protection trip stage is disabled if V/f Trip Func is set to Disabled. The overfluxing protection alarm stage may be Enabled/Disabled in the V/f Alarm Status cell. In general, a generator or generator transformer overflux condition will occur if the V/Hz ratio exceeds 1.05p.u. i.e. a 5% overvoltage condition at rated frequency. The element is set in terms of the actual ratio of voltage to frequency; the overfluxing threshold setting, V/f Trip Setting , can therefore be calculated as shown below:
V/f Trip Setting = 1.05 x
110 V = 2.31 = 1.05 x 50 f where - the VT secondary voltage at rated primary volts is 110V - the rated frequency is 50Hz
The overfluxing alarm stage threshold setting, V/f Alarm Set , can be set lower than the trip stage setting to provide an indication that abnormal conditions are present and alert an operator to adjust system parameters accordingly. The time delay settings should be chosen to match the withstand characteristics of the protected generator or generator/transformer. If an inverse time characteristic is selected, the time multiplier setting, V/f Trip TMS , should be chosen so the operating characteristic closely matches the withstand characteristic of the generator or generator/transformer. If a definite time setting is chosen for the trip stage the time delay is set in the V/f Trip Delay cell. The alarm stage time delay is set in the V/f Alarm Delay cell. Reference should be made to manufacturers withstand characteristics before formulating these settings. 2.19 Dead machine/unintentional energisation at standstill protection Accidental energisation of a generator when the machine is not running can cause severe damage to the machine. If the breaker is closed, when the machine is at standstill, the generator will begin to act as an induction motor with the surface of the rotor core and the rotor winding slot wedges acting as the rotor current conductors. This abnormal current in the rotor can cause arcing between components, eg. slot wedge to core, and results in rapid overheating and damage. To provide fast protection for this condition, the P343 relay provides an instantaneous overcurrent element that is gated with a three phase undervoltage detector. The scheme logic of this function is shown in Figure 20. The element is enabled when the machine is not running, ie. not generating any voltage, or when the breaker is open. Therefore the element can have a low current setting, resulting in high speed operation when required. For the element to operate correctly the relay voltage input must be from a machine side VT; busbar VTs cannot be used.
50
27 VTS
& &
tPU tDO
Trip
50 27
= instantaneous overcurrent detector = 3 phase undervoltage detector
VTS = VT fail output from voltage transformer supervision logic
Figure 20:
Fixed scheme logic for unintentional energisation of standstill protection
Setting ranges for the Dead Machine/Unintentional Energisation protection element are shown in the following table: Menu Text GROUP 1: Default Setting DEAD MACHINE Enabled 0.1 In A 80 V
(Vn=100/120V)
Setting Range Min Max Enabled, Disabled 0.08 In A 10V

(Vn=100/120V)
Step Size
Dead Mach Status Dead Mach I> Dead Mach V<
4 In A 120V
(Vn=100/120V)
0.01 In A 1V
(Vn=100/120V)
320V
(Vn=400/440V)
40V
(Vn=400/440V)
480V
(Vn=400/440V)
4V
(Vn=400/440V)
Dead Mach tPU Dead Mach tDO
5s 0s
0s 0s
10 s 10 s
0.1 s 0.1 s
2.19.1 Setting guidelines for dead machine protection The dead machine protection element can be selected by setting the Dead Mach Status cell to Enabled. The overcurrent threshold, Dead Mach I> , can be set to less than full load current as the element will not be enabled during normal machine operation. A setting of 10% of full load current can typically be used. The undervoltage threshold, Dead Mach V< , should typically be set at 85% of the nominal voltage to ensure that the element is enabled when the machine is not running. The pick-up time delay, Dead Mach tPU , which provides a small time delay to prevent initialisation of the element during system faults, should typically be set to 5s, or at least in excess of the protection clearance time for a close up phase to phase fault. The drop off time delay, Dead Mach tDO , ensures that the element remains
initialised following accidental closure of the circuit breaker, when the undervoltage detector could reset. A delay of 500ms will ensure that the element can operate when required. 2.20 Resistive temperature device (RTD) thermal protection Prolonged overloading of generators may cause their windings to overheat, resulting in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. Worn or unlubricated bearings can also generate localised heating within the bearing housing. To protect against any general or localised overheating, the P343 relay has the ability to accept inputs from upto 10 3 wire Type A PT100 resistive temperature sensing devices (RTD). These are connected as shown in Figure 21 below.
3 wire PT100 RTD RTD 1 RTD 2 2 wire PT100 RTD RTD 1 RTD 2
RTD 10 MiCOM P343
RTD 10 MiCOM P343
Figure 21:
Connection for RTD thermal probes
Such probes can be strategically placed in areas of the machine which are susceptible to overheating or heat damage. Where power transformers are located close to the protected machine, certain RTD probes could be assigned to provide overtemperature protection for the transformer(s). This could protect against winding hot spot overheating or overtemperature in the bulk of the insulating oil. Typically a PT100 RTD probe can measure temperature within the range -40 to +300 C. The resistance of these devices changes with temperature, at 0 C they have a resistance of 100. The temperature at each probe location can be determined by the relay, and is available for:
Temperature monitoring, displayed locally, or remotely via the relay

communications. time delay. time delay.
Alarming, should a temperature threshold be exceeded for longer than a set Tripping, should a temperature threshold be exceeded for longer than a set
Should the measured resistance be outside of the permitted range, an RTD failure alarm will be raised, indicating an open or short circuit RTD input. These conditions are signalled via DDB signals available within the PSL (DDB130-134).
DDB signals are also available to indicate the trip of the each RTD, (DDB192-201). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay. Note that direct temperature measurement can provide more reliable thermal protection than devices which use a thermal replica energised from phase current. The latter is susceptible to inaccuracies in time constants used by the replica model, and also inaccuracies due to the variation in ambient temperature. Setting ranges for the RTD Thermal protection are shown in the following table: Menu Text GROUP 1: Select RTD Default Setting RTD PROTECTION 0000000000 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 0 C 0 0 C 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select 100s 200 C 100s RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 C 1s 1 C 1s Setting Range Min Max Step Size
RTD x Alarm Set RTD x Alarm Dly RTD x Trip Set RTD x Trip Dly Where x = 1 to 10
80 C 10s 85 C 1s
200 C
2.20.1 Setting guidelines for RTD thermal protection Each RTD can be enabled by setting the relevant bit in Select RTD . For example if Select RTD is set to 0000000111, then RTD1, RTD2 and RTD3 would be enabled and the associated settings would be visible in the menu. The temperature setting for the alarm stage for each RTD can be set in the RTD x Alarm Set cells and the alarm time delay in the RTD x Alarm Dly cell. The temperature setting for the trip stage for each RTD can be set in the RTD x Trip Set cells and the trip stage time delay in the RTD x Trip Dly cell. Typical operating temperatures for protected plant are given in the table below. These are provided as a guide, actual figures MUST be obtained from the equipment manufacturers:
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 74 of 103 Short Term Overloading 60 - 80 C+
Parameter Bearing temperature generators Top oil temperature of transformers
Typical Service Temperature at Full Load 60 - 80 C, depending on the type of bearing. 80 C (50 - 60 C above ambient).
A temperature gradient from winding temperature is usually assumed, such that top oil RTDs can provide winding protection. 140 C+ during emergencies.
Winding hot spot temperature
98 C for normal ageing of insulation.Cyclic overloading might give
Table showing typical operating temperatures of plant. 2.21 Pole slipping protection A generator might pole-slip, or fall out-of-step with other power system sources, in the event of failed or abnormally weak excitation or as a result of delayed system fault clearance. This can be further aggravated when there is a weak (high reactance) transmission link between the generator and the rest of the power system. The process of pole-slipping following excitation failure is discussed in Section 2.10. The P340 field failure protection function should respond to such situations to give a time delayed trip. The electrical/mechanical power/torque oscillations following excitation failure may be relatively gentle. If pole slipping occurs with maximum excitation (generator emf >2.0 p.u.), the power/torque oscillations and power system voltage fluctuations following loss of stability can be much more severe. For large machines there may be a requirement to provide protection to trip the generator under such circumstances, to prevent plant damage or remove the disturbance to the power system. Pole-slipping protection is frequently requested for relatively small generators running in parallel with strong public supplies. This might be where a cogenerator runs in parallel with the distribution system of a public utility, which may be a relatively strong source, but where high-speed protection for distribution system faults is not provided. The delayed clearance of system faults may pose a stability threat for the co-generation plant. With the P340 relay there is no specific pole-slipping protection function, but a number of the protection functions provided can offer a method of ensuring delayed tripping, if appropriately applied. 2.21.1 Reverse power protection During a pole slipping event the machine will cyclically absorb and export power as the machine rotor slips with respect to the power system. Therefore, any power element selected to operate from reverse power can pick-up during the pole slip. Reverse power protection tripping is usually time delayed and this time delay will prevent the element from tripping during a pole slip. However, each power protection stage in the P340 relay has an associated delay on
drop off, or reset, timer ( Power1 DO Timer , Power2 DO Timer ). This can be used to prevent resetting of the reverse power stage during a pole slipping event, leading to eventual tripping if the event continues. 2.21.2 System back-up protection function In a similar manner to the power protection function, the system back-up protection function would operate cyclically with the periodic high levels of stator current that would arise during pole-slipping. These peaks of current may also be accompanied by coincident drops in generator terminal voltage, if the generator is near the electrical centre of swinging. As discussed in Section 2.5, the system back-up protection function is provided with a timer characteristic timer-hold setting, V Dep OC tRESET , Z< tRESET , which can be used to ensure that the protection function will respond to cyclic operation during poleslipping. In a similar manner, some operators of small, unmanned hydrogenerators have relied on the integrating action of induction disc overcurrent protection to ensure disconnection of a persistently slipping machine. 2.21.3 Field failure protection function Slightly faster pole-slipping protection might be assured in many applications by appropriately applying the field failure protection function and associated scheme logic timers. Where the power system source impedance is relatively small in relation to the impedance of a generator during pole-slipping, the electrical centre of slipping is likely to lie within the generator. This would be behind the relaying point, as defined by the location of the voltage transformer. Such a situation is likely to exist for co-generation schemes and might also be the case for some fairly large utility generation schemes connected to a densely interconnected transmission system. The dynamic impedance of the generator during pole-slipping (Xg) should lie between the average value of the direct and quadrature axis transient reactances (Xd and Xq) and the average value of the direct/ quadrature axis synchronous reactances (Xd and Xq). However neither extreme would actually be reached. During low-slip periods of a pole-slip cycle, the synchronous reactances would apply, whereas the transient impedances would apply during periods of relatively high slip. Figure 22 illustrates how the impedance seen at the generator protection relaying point may vary during pole-slipping for a relatively small co-generator directly connected to a relatively strong distribution power system. It should be noted that the behaviour of a generator during pole slipping may be further complicated by intervention of an automatic voltage regulator and by the response of any speed-dependent excitation source (eg. shaft-driven exciter).
Eg Zg Ir Zs
Es
Base MVA = 15 MVA Xd = 130% Xd' = 34% Xs = 4.3% (18.37kA at 11kV)
jX Xs
Eg/Es = 2.8 (>max) R
Eg/Es = 1.2 0.5Xd' Eg/Es = 1.0 Xg Case: 15 MVA GT Condition: Xg = Xd Eg/Es = 0.19 (<min) Diameter = Xd Eg/Es = 0.8
Figure 22:
Field failure protection function characteristics (small co-genrator)
It can be seen from the simple analysis of Figure 22 that the field failure protection function may respond to the variation in impedance seen during pole slipping for some applications. However the impedance characteristic offset might have to be reduced to guarantee response for the theoretical lower range of dynamic generator impedance (Xg). The lack of the normally recommended characteristic offset should not pose any problem of unwanted protection function response during the normal range of operation of a machine (with rotor angles kept below 90 ), but a longer trip time delay might be required to prevent unwanted protection response during stable power swings caused by system disturbances. The most marginal condition to detect is where the generator is fully loaded, with maximum excitation applied. Even if the impedance characteristic offset is not reduced, impedance element pick up should still occur during part of a slip cycle, when the machine impedance is high and where the rotor angle is high. More careful consideration might have to be given to the reset time delay setting ( FFail1 DO Timer ) required in such circumstances. During pole-slipping, any operation of the field failure protection function will be cyclic and so it would be necessary to set the reset time delay ( FFail1 DO Timer ) to be longer than the time for which the impedance seen will cyclically lie outside the field failure characteristic. A typical delay setting might be 0.6s, to cover slip frequencies in excess of 2Hz. When the timer FFail1 DO Timer is set, the field failure trip time delay ( FFail1 TimeDelay ) must be increased to be greater than the setting of FFail1 DO Timer .
Sometimes pole-slipping protection must be guaranteed, especially in the case of a larger utility generator connected to a relatively weak transmission system. In such applications, and where fast tripping is required, or where the pole-slipping response of field failure protection function is otherwise uncertain, a stand-alone protection scheme, using HV current and voltage signals, should supplement. The delayed detection and tripping offered by the P340 Field Failure protection function should, however, be adequate for many applications. For further details regarding setting of field Failure protection for time delayed pole slipping detection, contact ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control, Applications Department. 2.22 Circuit breaker failure protection Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent damage / further damage to the power system. For transmission/subtransmssion systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation, breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate. CBF operation can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed. 2.22.1 Breaker failure protection configurations The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, CB Fail 1 Timer and CB Fail 2 Timer, allowing configuration for the following scenarios:
Simple CBF, where only CB Fail 1 Timer is enabled. For any protection trip,
the CB Fail 1 Timer is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, CB Fail 1 Timer times out and closes an output contact assigned to breaker fail (using the programmable scheme logic). This contact is used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section. used to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This requires duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping. Should re-tripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued following an additional time delay. The backtrip uses CB Fail 2 Timer, which is also started at the instant of the initial protection element trip.
A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. Here, CB Fail 1 Timer is
CBF elements CB Fail 1 Timer and CB Fail 2 Timer can be configured to operate for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an external protection trip. The latter is acheived by allocating one of the relay opto-isolated inputs to External Trip using the programmable scheme logic. 2.22.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current,
as required. This covers the following situations:
Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied

upon to definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped.
Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This
may result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional arcing resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit fault current, the initiating protection element may reset. Thus, reset of the element may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses operation of undercurrent elements (I<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles have tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may not be reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in all applications. For example:
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or
under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a line connected voltage transformer. Here, I< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating protection element might be a more reliable method. under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage transformer. Again using I< would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded. Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the initiating condition from the busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection element may not occur. In such cases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts may give the best reset method.
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relays pole dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting options are summarised in the following table: Initiation (Menu selectable) Current based protection (eg. 50/51/46/21/87..) CB fail timer reset mechnaism The resetting mechanism is fixed. [IA< operates] & [IB< operates] & [IC< operates] & [IN< operates] The resetting mechanism is fixed. [ISEF< operates] Three options are available. The user can select from the following options. [All I< and IN< elements operate] [Protection element reset] AND [All I< and IN< elements operate] CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN< elements operate]
Sensitive earth fault element Non-current based protection (eg. 27/59/81/32L..)
External protection -
Three options are available. The user can select any or all of the options. [All I< and IN< elements operate] [External trip reset] AND [All I< and IN< elements operate] CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN< elements operate]
The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows: Menu text CB FAIL + I< Breaker Fail CB Fail 1 Status CB Fail 1 Timer CB Fail 2 Status CB Fail 2 Timer CBF Ext Reset Under Current I< Current Set IN< Current Set ISEF< Current Blocked O/C CBF Blocks I> CBF Blocks IN> Disabled Disabled 0.1In 0.1In 0.02In Enabled 0.2s Disabled 0.4s CB Open & I< 0s 0s {Sub-Heading} Enabled, Disabled 10s Enabled, Disabled 10s 0.01s I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I< I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I< {Sub-Heading} 0.02In 0.02In 0.001In 3.2In 3.2In 0.8In 0.01In 0.01In 0.00025In 0.01s Default Min Max Step
CBF Non I Reset CB Open & I<
{Sub-Heading} Enabled, Disabled Enabled, Disabled
The CBF Blocks I> and CBF Blocks IN> settings are used to remove starts issued from the overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker fail time out. The start is removed when the cell is set to Enabled. 2.22.3 Typical settings 2.22.3.1Breaker fail timer settings Typical timer settings to use are as follows: CB Fail Reset Mechanism Initiating element reset tBF time delay CB interrupting time + element reset time (max.) + error in tBF timer + safety margin Typical delay for 2 cycle circuit breaker 50 + 50 + 10 + 50 = 160 ms
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 80 of 103 CB auxiliary contacts opening/closing time (max) + error in tBF timer + safety margin CB interrupting time + undercurrent element (max.) + safety margin operating time 50 + 10 + 50 = 110 ms
CB open
Undercurrent elements
50 + 25 + 50 = 125 ms
Note that all CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements. Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting should still be used if this proves to be the worst case. The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2 cycle circuit breaker. Note that where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10-15 ms must be added to allow for trip relay operation. 2.22.4 Breaker fail undercurrent settings The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to ensure that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator circuit breaker CBF. The sensitive earth fault protection (SEF) and standby earth fault (SBEF) undercurrent elements must be set less than the respective trip setting, typically as follows: ISEF<= I N< = 2.23 (ISEF> trip) / 2 (IN> trip) / 2
Breaker flashover protection Prior to generator synchronisation, or just following generator tripping, where the protected generator could be slipping with respect to a power system, it is possible to establish at least twice rated phase-neutral voltage across the generator circuit breaker. An even higher voltage might briefly be established just after generator tripping for prime mover failure, where the pre-failure level of excitation might be maintained until AVR action takes place. Whilst generator circuit breakers must be designed to handle such situations, the probability of breaker interrupter breakdown or breakdown of open terminal switch gear insulators is increased and such failures have occurred. This mode of breaker failure is most likely to occur on one phase initially and can be detected by a neutral current measuring element. If the generator is directly connected to the power system, the second stage of stator earth fault protection ( IN>2 ... ) could be applied as an instantaneous element by setting the time delay IN>2 TimeDelay to 0s, to quickly detect the flashover. To prevent loss of co-ordination this stage must be blocked when the circuit breaker is closed. This can be programmed by correct configuration of the programmable scheme logic and can be integrated into the circuit breaker fail logic, as shown in Figure 23. Where the machine is connected to the system via a step-up transformer a similar scheme can be arranged. The P340 relay standby earth fault protection
element can be connected to measure the transformer HV earth fault current to provide the breaker flashover protection, via suitable scheme logic. The machine earth fault protection can be provided by the P340 sensitive earth fault protection element, as shown in Figure 24.
Scheme logic in PSL
DDB 39 L8 52-B
&
IN>2 Trip DDB 205
DDB 168 Extern Trip 3ph
IN
DDB 310 Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ISEF
MiCOM P343
R5 CD fail trip DW 100
Figure 23:
Breaker falshover protection for directly connected machine
Scheme logic in PSL

DDB 39 L8 52-B
&
IN>2 Trip DDB 205
DDB 168 Extern Trip 3ph
IN
DDB 310 Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ISEF
MiCOM P343
R5 CD fail trip DW 100
Figure 24:
2.24
Breaker flashover protection for indirectly connected machine
Blocked overcurrent protection Blocked overcurrent protection involves the use of start contacts from downstream relays wired onto blocking inputs of upstream relays. This allows identical current and time settings to be employed on each of the relays involved in the scheme, as the relay nearest to the fault does not receive a blocking signal and hence trips discriminatively. This type of scheme therefore reduces the amount of required grading stages and consequently fault clearance times. The principle of blocked overcurrent protection may be extended by setting fast acting overcurrent elements on the incoming feeders to a substation which are
then arranged to be blocked by start contacts from the relays protecting the outgoing feeders. The fast acting element is thus allowed to trip for a fault condition on the busbar but is stable for external feeder faults by means of the blocking signal. This type of scheme therefore provides much reduced fault clearance times for busbar faults than would be the case with conventional time graded overcurrent protection. The availability of multiple overcurrent and earth fault stages means that back-up time graded overcurrent protection is also provided. This is shown in Figures 25a and 25b.
Incomer Block highset element CB fail backtrip
P140
P140
O/P from start contact CB fail backtrip
P140
P140
P140
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
Feeder 3
Feeder 4
Figure 25a: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
10.0
Time (secs)
1.0
0.1 0.08 0.01
Incomer IDMT element IDMT margin Feeder IDMT element Incomer high set element Feeder start contact 1.0 10.0 Current (kA) Time to block 100.0
Figure 25b: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
The P140 relays have start outputs available from each stage of each of the overcurrent and earth fault elements, including sensitive earth fault. These start signals may then be routed to output contacts by programming accordingly. Each stage is also capable of being blocked by being programmed to the relevant opto-isolated input. Note that the P140 relays provide a 50V field supply for powering the optoinputs. Hence, in the unlikely event of the faulure of this supply, blocking of that relay would not be possible. For this reason, the field supply is supervised and if a failure is detected, it is possible, via the relays programmable scheme logic, to provide an output alarm contact. This contact can then be used to signal an alarm within the substation. Alternatively, the relays scheme logic could be arranged to block any of the overcurrent/earth fault stages that would operate non-discriminatively due to the blocking signal failure. For further guidance on the use of blocked overcurrent schemes refer to ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd.
Section 3.
3.1
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
VT supervision The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the ac voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually results in one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input there would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation. The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure, and automatically adjust the configuration of protection elements whose stability would otherwise be compromised. A time-delayed alarm output is also available. There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply. These are defined below: 1.Loss of one or two phase voltages 2.Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions 3.Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation 4.Loss of one or two phase voltages The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of negative phase sequence (nps) voltage without the presence of negative phase sequence current. This gives operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of nps current. The use of negative sequence quantities ensures correct operation even where three-limb or V connected VTs are used. Negative sequence VTS element: The negative sequence thresholds used by the element are V2 = 10V (or 40V on a 380/440V rated relay), and I2 = 0.05 to 0.5In settable (defaulted to 0.05In).
3.1.1
Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions Under the loss of all three phase voltages to the relay, there will be no negative phase sequence quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under such circumstances, a collapse of the three phase voltages will occur. If this is detected without a corresponding change in any of the phase current signals (which would be indicative of a fault), then a VTS condition will be raised. In practice, the relay detects the presence of superimposed current signals, which are changes in the current applied to the relay. These signals are generated by comparison of the present value of the current with that exactly one cycle previously. Under normal load conditions, the value of superimposed current should therefore be zero. Under a fault condition a superimposed current signal will be generated which will prevent operation of the VTS. The phase voltage level detectors are fixed and will drop off at 10V (40V on 380/440V relays) and pickup at 30V (120V on 380/440V relays). The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is fixed at 0.1In.
3.1.2
Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation If a VT were inadvertently left isolated prior to line energisation, incorrect operation of voltage dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element detected three phase VT failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no corresponding change in current. On line energisation there will, however, be a change in current (as a result of load or line charging current for example). An alternative method of detecting 3 phase VT failure is therefore required on line energisation. The absence of measured voltage on all 3 phases on line energisation can be as a result of 2 conditions. The first is a 3 phase VT failure and the second is a close up three phase fault. The first condition would require blocking of the voltage dependent function and the second would require tripping. To differentiate between these 2 conditions an overcurrent level detector (VTS I> Inhibit) is used which will prevent a VTS block from being issued if it operates. This element should be set in excess of any non-fault based currents on line energisation (load, line charging current, transformer inrush current if applicable) but below the level of current produced by a close up 3 phase fault. If the line is now closed where a 3 phase VT failure is present the overcurrent detector will not operate and a VTS block will be applied. Closing onto a three phase fault will result in operation of the overcurrent detector and prevent a VTS block being applied. This logic will only be enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the relays pole dead logic) to prevent operation under dead system conditions ie. where no voltage will be present and the VTS I> Inhibit overcurrent element will not be picked up.
3.1.3
Menu settings The VTS settings are found in the SUPERVISION column of the relay menu. The relevant settings are detailed below:
GROUP 1: SUPERVISION VTS Status VTS Reset Mode VTS Time Delay VTS I> Inhibit VTS I2> Inhibit Default Blocking Manual 5s 10In 0.05In 1s 0.08In 0.05In Min Max Blocking, Indication Manual, Auto 10s 32In 0.5In 0.1s 0.01In 0.01In Step
The relay may respond as follows, on operation of any VTS element:
VTS set to provide alarm indication only; Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements; Optional conversion of directional overcurrent elements to non-directional
protection (available when set to blocking mode only). These settings are found in the function links cell of the relevant protection element columns in the menu.
The VTS I> Inhibit or VTS I2> Inhibit elements are used to overide a VTS block in event of a fault occurring on the system which could trigger the VTS logic. Once the VTS block has been established, however, then it would be undesirable for subsequent system faults to override the block. The VTS block will therefore be latched after a user settable time delay VTS Time Delay. Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available. The first is manually via the front panel interface (or remote communications) provided the VTS condition has been removed and secondly, when in Auto mode, by the restoration of the 3 phase voltages above the phase level detector settings mentioned previously. A VTS indication will be given after the VTS Time Delay has expired. In the case where the VTS is set to indicate only the relay may potentially maloperate, depending on which protection elements are enabled. In this case the VTS indication will be given prior to the VTS time delay expiring if a trip signal is given. Where a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is used to protect the voltage transformer ac output circuits, it is common to use MCB auxiliary contacts to indicate a three phase output disconnection. As previously described, it is possible for the VTS logic to operate correctly without this input. However, this facility has been provided for compatibility with various utilities current practices. Energising an opto-isolated input assigned to MCB Open on the relay will therefore provide the necessary block. Where directional overcurrent elements are converted to non-directional protection on VTS operation, it must be ensured that the current pick-up setting of these elements is higher than full load current. 3.2 CT supervision The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current
circuits risks dangerous CT secondary voltages being generated. 3.2.1 The CT supervision feature The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived residual current, in the absence of corresponding derived residual voltage that would normally accompany it. The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer residual voltages from the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be enabled where the VT is of five limb construction, or comprises three single phase units, and has the primary star point earthed. Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and event record (plus DDB 115: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block (DDB 290: CTS Block) for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements operating from derived quantities (Broken Conductor, Earth Fault2, Neg Seq O/C) are always blocked on operation of the CT supervision element; other protections can be selectively blocked by customising the PSL, integrating DDB 290: CTS Block with the protection function logic. The following table shows the relay menu for the CT supervision element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu Text GROUP 1: CTS Status CTS VN< Inhibit 1 Default Setting SUPERVISION Sub Heading Disabled Enabled/Disabled N/A 0.5 / 2V For 110/440V respectively 22 / 88V For 110/440V respectively 0.5 / 2V For 110/440V respectively 0 5 0.08 x In 0s 4 x In 10s 0.01 x In 1s Setting Range Min CT Supervision Max Step Size
CTS IN> Set CTS Time Delay 3.2.2
Setting the CT supervision element The residual voltage setting, "CTS Vn< Inhibit" and the residual current setting, "CTS In> set", should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system conditions. For example "CTS Vn< Inhibit" should be set to 120% of the maximum steady state residual voltage. The "CTS In> set" will typically be set below minimum load current. The time-delayed alarm, "CTS Time Delay", is generally set to 5 seconds. Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is unpredictable, the element be disabled to prevent a protection elements being blocked during fault conditions.
3.2.3
Circuit breaker state monitoring An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching
operations. The relay incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker, or, if the state is unknown, an alarm is raised. If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 5s time delay. A normally open / normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function via the programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to avoid unwanted operation during normal switching duties. In the CB CONTROL column of the relay menu there is a setting called CB Status Input. This cell can be set at one of the following four options: None 52A 52B Both 52A and 52B Where None is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect any function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, auto-reclose, etc. Where only 52A is used on its own then the relay will assume a 52B signal from the absence of the 52A signal. Circuit breaker status information will be available in this case but no discrepancy alarm will be available. The above is also true where only a 52B is used. If both 52A and 52B are used then status information will be available and in addition a discrepancy alarm will be possible, according to the following table. 52A and 52B inputs are assigned to relay opto-isolated inputs via the PSL. Auxiliary Contact Position 52A Open Closed Closed 52B Closed Open Closed Breaker Open Breaker Closed CB Failure Circuit breaker healthy Circuit breaker healthy Alarm raised if the condition persists for greater than 5s Alarm raised if the condition persists for greater than 5s CB State Detected Action
Open
Open
State Unknown
3.2.4
Circuit breaker condition monitoring Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and mechanism operate correctly, and also that the interrupting capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive maintenance. The P140 relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. These montioring features are discussed in the following section.
3.2.4.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are counter values only. The Min/Max values in this case show the range of the counter values. These cells can not be set: CB Condition CB operations {3 pole tripping} CB A operations {1 & 3 pole tripping} CB B operations {1 & 3 pole tripping} CB C operations {1 & 3 pole tripping} Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken CB operate time Reset all values Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Max 10000 10000 10000 10000 25000In^ 25000In^ 25000In^ 0.5s Yes, No Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1n^ 0.001
The above counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance inspection and overhaul. The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition monitoring, is taken from the relay menu. It includes the setup of the current broken facility and those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB lockout. CB Monitor Setup Broken I^ Default 2 Alarm disabled 1000In^ Alarm disabled 2000In^ Alarm disabled 10 Alarm disabled 20 Alarm disabled Min 1 Max 2 Step 0.1
I^ Maintenance I^ Maintenance I^ Lockout I^ Lockout

No CB ops maint No CB ops maint N CB ops lock
o
Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled 1In^ 25000In^ 1In^
Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled 1In^ 25000In^ 1In^
Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled 1 10000 1
Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled 1 10000 1
No CB ops lock CB time maint
Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
3.2.4.2 Circuit breaker state monitoring features MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed (52b) auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these contacts will be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would indicate one of the following conditions: Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective CB is in isolated position Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions would apply: Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock Fault Freq Count Fault Freq Time 0.1s Alarm Disabled 0.2s Alarm Disabled 10 3600s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 0 0 9999 9999s 1 1s
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by allocating one of the relays opto-isolated inputs (via the programmable scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped to the opto is called External Trip. Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters will not be updated. 3.2.5 Event & fault records The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in nonvolatile (battery backed up) memory. This enables the system operator to establish the sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the new one. The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a resolution of 1ms. The event records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or remotely, via the communications ports. Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled VIEW RECORDS. This column allows viewing of event, fault and maintenance records
and is shown below:VIEW RECORDS LCD Reference Select Event Description Setting range from 0 to 249. This selects the required event record from the possible 250 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest event and so on. Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal Real Time Clock Up to 32 Character description of the Event (refer to following sections) Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag or integer representative of the Event (refer to following sections) Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest fault and so on. The following cells show all the fault flags, protection starts, protection trips, fault location, measurements etc. associated with the fault, ie. the complete fault record. Select Report Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required maintenance report from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest report and so on. Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer to following sections) These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence. They form a specific error code which should be quoted in any related correspondence to ALSTOM T&D P&C Ltd. Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED indications provided that the relevant protection element has reset.
Time & Date Event Text Event Value Select Fault
Report Text Report Type
Report Data Reset Indication
For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to Chapter 5, where the procedure is fully explained. Note that a full list of all the event types and the meaning of their values is given in Appendix 1. Types of Event An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm condition, setting change etc. The following sections show the various items that constitute an event:-
3.2.6
Change of state of opto-isolated inputs. If one or more of the opto (logic) inputs has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown below; Time & Date of Event LOGIC INPUTS Event Value 0101010101010101 The Event Value is an 8 or 16 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs, where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc. The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
3.2.7
Change of state of one or more output relay contacts. If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown below; Time & Date of Event OUTPUT CONTACTS Event Value 010101010101010101010 The Event Value is a 7, 14 or 21 bit word showing the status of the output contacts, where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output contact 1 etc. The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
3.2.8
Relay alarm conditions. Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events. The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and how they appear in the event list:Alarm condition Event text
Battery Fail Field Voltage Fail Setting group via opto invalid Protection Disabled Frequency out of range VTS Alarm CB Trip Fail Protection Battery Fail ON/OFF Field V Fail ON/OFF Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF Protn Disabled ON/OFF Freq out of Range ON/OFF VT Fail Alarm ON/OFF CB Fail ON/OFF
Resulting event Event value

Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31
The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various alarm conditions and also a corresponding value between 0 and 31. This value is appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input and output events previously described. It is used by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on the LCD. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the particular condition has become operated or has reset. 3.2.9 Protection element starts and trips Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition), will be logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, rather than for the user, and is therefore invisible when the event is viewed on the LCD. 3.2.10 General events A number of events come under the heading of General Events - an example is shown below:Nature of Event Level 1 password modified, either from user interface, front or rear port Displayed text in event record PW1 edited UI, F or R Displayed value 0
A complete list of the General Events is given in Appendix 1. 3.2.11 Fault records. Each time a fault record is generated, an event is also created. The event simply states that a fault record was generated, with a corresponding time stamp. Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the Select Fault cell further down the VIEW RECORDS column, which is selectable from up to 5 records. These records consist of fault flags, fault location, fault measurements etc. Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is logged some time after the actual fault record is generated. 3.2.12 Maintenance reports Internal failures detected by the self monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog failure, field voltage failure etc. are logged into a maintenance report. The Maintenance Report holds up to 5 such events and is accessed from the Select Report cell at the bottom of the VIEW RECORDS column. Each entry consists of a self explanatory text string and a Type and Data cell, which are explained in the menu extract at the beginning of this section and in further detail in Appendix 1. Each time a Maintenance Report is generated, an event is also created. The event simply states that a report was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
3.2.13 Setting changes Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples are shown in the following table:Type of Setting Change Control/Support Setting Group 1 Change Note: Displayed Text in Event Record C & S Changed Group 1 Changed Displayed Value 0 1
Control/Support settings are communications, measurement, CT/VT ratio settings etc, which are not duplicated within the four setting groups. When any of these settings are changed, the event record is created simultaneously. However, changes to protection or disturbance recorder settings will only generate an event once the settings have been confirmed at the setting trap.
3.2.14 Resetting of event / fault records If it is required to delete either the event, fault or maintenance reports, this may be done from within the RECORD CONTROL column. 3.2.15 Viewing Event Records via MiCOM S1 Support Software When the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly different than when viewed on the LCD. The following shows an example of how various events appear when displayed using MiCOM S1:-
Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:49 GMT I>1 Start ON 2147483881 ALSTOM : MiCOM Model Number: P141 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 23 Event Type: Protection operation
Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:52 GMT Fault Recorded 0 ALSTOM : MiCOM Model Number: P141 Address: 001 Column: 01 Row: 00 Event Type: Fault record
Monday 03 November 1998 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000 ALSTOM : MiCOM Model Number: P141 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 20 Event Type: Logic input changed state
Monday 03 November 1998 15:34:54 GMT Output Contacts 0010000 ALSTOM : MiCOM Model Number: P141 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 21 Event Type: Relay output changed state
As can be seen , the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/- symbol. For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to Appendix 1. 3.3 Disturbance recorder The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. The number of records that may be stored is dependent upon the selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second duration. Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one. The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 12 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of eight analogue data channels and thirty-two digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities). The DISTURBANCE RECORDER menu column is shown below:Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min DISTURBANCE RECORDER Duration Trigger Position Trigger Mode Analog Channel 1 1.5s 33.3% Single VAN 0.1s 0 10.5s 100% Single or Extended VAN,VBN,VCN,VCHECK SYNC,IA,IB,IC,IN, IN SEF As above As above As above As above As above As above As above 0.01s 0.1% Max Step Size
Analog Channel 2 Analog Channel 3 Analog Channel 4 Analog Channel 5 Analog Channel 6 Analog Channel 7 Analog Channel 8
VBN VCN IA IB IC IN IN SEF

Relays 1 to 7/14 Any of 7 or 14 O/P Contacts and/or Optos 1 to 8/16 Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs or Internal Digital Signals
Digital Inputs 1 to 32
Inputs 1 to 32 Trigger
No Trigger
No Trigger, Trigger L/H, except Dedicated Trigger H/L Trip Relay O/Ps which are set to Trigger L/H
Note:
The available analogue and digital signals will differ between relay types and models and so the individual courier database in Chapter 5 should be referred to when determining default settings etc.
The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the Duration and Trigger Position cells. Duration sets the overall recording time and the Trigger Position sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times. If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore the trigger if the Trigger Mode has been set to Single. However, if this has been set to Extended, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the recording time. As can be seen from the menu, each of the analogue channels is selectable from the available analogue inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LEDs etc. The complete list of these signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the Input Trigger cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts (e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder. It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully explained in Chapter 5. 3.4 Measurements The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated power system quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second basis and are summarised below: Phase Voltages and Currents Phase to Phase Voltage and Currents Sequence Voltages and currents Power and Energy Quantities Rms. Voltages and Currents
Peak, Fixed and Rolling Demand Values There are also measured values from the protection functions, which also displayed under the measurement columns of the menu; these are described in the section on the relevant protection function. 3.4.1 Measured voltages and currents The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and current values. The are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by the relay protection functions and present both magnitude and phase angle measurement. 3.4.2 Sequence voltages and currents Sequence quantities are produced by the relay from the measured Fourier values; these are displayed as magnitude values. 3.4.3 Power and energy quantities Using the measured voltages and currents the relay calculates the apparent, real and reactive power quantities. These are produced on a phase by phase basis together with three-phase values based on the sum of the three individual phase values. The signing of the real and reactive power measurements can be controlled using the measurement mode setting. The four options are defined in the table below: Measurement Mode 0 (Default) Parameter Export Power Import Power Lagging VArs Leading VArs 1 Export Power Import Power Lagging VArs Leading VArs 2 Export Power Import Power Lagging VArs Leading VArs 3 Export Power Import Power Lagging VArs Leading VArs Signing + + + + + + + + -
In addition to the measured power quantities the relay calculates the power factor on a phase by phase basis in addition to a three-phase power factor. These power values are also used to increment the total real and reactive energy measurements. Separate energy measurements are maintained for the total exported and imported energy. The energy measurements are incremented up to maximum values of 1000GWhr or 1000GVARhr at which point they will reset to zero, it is also possible to reset these values using the menu or remote interfaces using the Reset Demand cell. 3.4.4 Rms. voltages and currents Rms. Phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the sum of the samples squared over a cycle of sampled data. 3.4.5 Demand values The relay produces fixed, rolling and peak demand values, using the Reset Demand menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the User Interface or the remote communications. 3.4.5.1 Fixed demand values The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over the specified interval; values are produced for each phase current and for three phase real and reactive power. The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those for the previous interval, the values are updated at the end of the fixed demand period. 3.4.5.2 Rolling demand values The rolling demand values are similar to the fixed demand values, the difference being that a sliding window is used. The rolling demand window consists of a number of smaller sub-periods. The resolution of the sliding window is the sub-period length, with the displayed values being updated at the end of each of the sub-periods. 3.4.5.3 Peak demand values Peak demand values are produced for each phase current and the real and reactive power quantities. These display the maximum value of the measured quantity since the last reset of the demand values. 3.4.6 Settings The following settings under the heading Measurement Setup can be used to configure the relay measurement function. Measurement Setup Default Display Default Value Description Options/Limits Description/Plant Reference/ Frequency/Access Level/3Ph + N Current/3Ph Voltage/Power/Date and time Primary/Secondary Primary/Secondary VA/VB/VC/IA/ IB/ I C 0 to 3 Step 1
Local Values Remote Values Measurement Ref Measurement Mode
Primary Primary VA 0
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 98 of 103 30 minutes 30 minutes 1 Km Distance 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute 1 to 15 step 1 Km/miles Distance/Ohms/% of Line
Fix Dem Period Roll Sub Period Num Sub Periods Distance Unit* Fault Location* 3.4.6.1 Default display
* Note these settings are available for products with integral fault location. This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options, note that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the default level using the and keys. However once the 15 minute timeout elapses the default display will revert to that selected by this setting. 3.4.6.2 Local values This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface and the front Courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities. 3.4.6.3 Remote values This setting controls whether measured values via the rear communication port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities. 3.4.6.4 Measurement REF Using this setting the phase reference for all angular measurements by the relay can be selected. 3.4.6.5 Measurement mode This setting is used to control the signing of the real and reactive power quantities; the signing convention used is defined in Table XX. 3.4.6.6 Fixed demand period This setting defines the length of the fixed demand window. 3.4.6.7 Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods These two settings are used to set the length of the window used for the calculation of rolling demand quantities and the resolution of the slide for this window. 3.4.6.8 Distance unit This setting is used to select the unit of distance for fault location purposes, note that the length of the line is preserved when converting from km to miles and visa versa. 3.4.6.9 Fault location The calculated fault location can be displayed using one of several options selected using this setting.
Section 4.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
The current transformer requirements for each current input will depend on the protection function with which they are related and whether the line current transformers are being shared with other current inputs. Where current transformers are being shared by multiple current inputs, the kneepoint voltage requirements should be calculated for each input and the highest calculated value used. 4.1 4.1.1 Generator differential function Biased differential protection The kneepoint voltage requirements for the current transformers used for the current inputs of the generator differential function, with settings of Is1 = 0.05In, k1 = 0%, Is2 = 1.2In, k2=150%, and with a boundary condition of through fault current 10In and X/R ratio 120, is:
Vk 50 I n (R ct + 2R L + R r ) with a minimum of 60
Where: In = Relay rated current. Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (). RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (). Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current transformer (). For Class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint voltage requirement should be less than 2.5In. For IEC standard protection class current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used. 4.1.2 High impedance differential protection If the generator differential protection function is to be used to implement high impedance differential protection, then the current transformer requirements will be as follows: Rs = [1.5 * (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS1 VK 2 * Is * Rs where Rs If VK I S1 RCT RL = = = = = = Value of stabilising resistor (ohms) Maximum through fault current level (amps) CT knee point voltage (volts) Current setting of REF element (amps) Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms) Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
In
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault stability.
4.2
Voltage dependent overcurrent, field failure and negative phase sequence protection functions When determining the current transformer requirements for an input that supplies several protection functions, it must be ensured that the most onerous condition is met. This has been taken into account in the formula given below. The formula is equally applicable for current transformers mounted at either the neutral-tail end or terminal end of the generator.
Vk 20 I n (R ct + 2RL + Rr )
Where: Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault stability. I n = Relay rated current. Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (). RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (). Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current transformer (). For class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint voltage requirement should be less than 1.0In. For IEC standard protection class current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used. 4.3 4.3.1 Sensitive directional earth fault protection function residual current input Line current transformers With reference to Section 2.15, the sensitive directional earth fault input current transformer could be driven by three residually connected line current transformers. It has been assumed that the sensitive directional earth fault protection function will only be applied when the stator earth fault current is limited to the stator winding rated current or less. Also assumed is that the maximum X/R ratio for the impedance to a bus earth fault will be no greater than 5. The required minimum kneepoint voltage will therefore be:
Vk 20 I n (R ct + 2RL + Rr )
Where: Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault stability. I n = Relay rated current. Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (). RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (). Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current transformer (). For class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint voltage requirement should be less than 0.3In. For IEC standard protection class current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used.
4.3.2
Core balanced current transformers Unlike a line current transformer, the rated primary current for a core balanced current transformer may not be equal to the stator winding rated current. This has been taken into account in the formula:
Vk > 6NI n (R ct + 2RL + Rr )

Where: Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault stability. N=
Stator rated current Core balanced current transformer rated primary current
I n = Relay rated current. Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (). RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (). Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current transformer (). Note: N should not be greater than 2. The core balance current transformer ratio should be selected accordingly. 4.4 Stator earth fault protection function and sensitive directional earth fault current polarising input The earth path current input is used by the stator earth fault protection function and as the current polarising signal for the sensitive directional earth fault protection function. The primary rating of the earth path current transformer may not be related to the stator winding rated current as discussed in Section 2.13. Therefore, the requirements for the earth path current transformer will be similar to that detailed in Section 4.3.2, as follows:
Vk > 6NI n (R ct + 2RL + Rr )

Where: Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault stability. N=
Statorratedcurrent Earthpath currenttransforme r ratedprimarycurrent
I n = Relay rated current. Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (). RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (). Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current transformer (). Note: N should not be greater than 2. The earth path current transformer ratio should be selected accordingly.
4.5 Restricted earth fault protection 4.5.1 Low impedance VK VK where 24 * In * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40 and If < 15In 48 * In * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40, 15In < If < 40In and 40 <X/R < 120, If < 15In
Vk
VK In RCT RL If 4.5.2 = = = = =
VA ALF + ALF I n Rct In
Required CT knee point voltage (volts), rated secondary current (amps), Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms) Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms), Maximum through fault current level (amps).
High impedance The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall maintain stability for through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided the following equations are met in determining CT requirements and the value of the associated stabilising resistor: Rs VK where Rs If VK I S1 RCT RL = = = = = = Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms), Maximum through fault current level (amps). CT knee point voltage (volts), Current setting of REF element (amps), Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms) Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms). = [0.7 * (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS1 4 * Is * Rs
4.5
Reverse and low forward power protection functions For both reverse and low forward power protection function settings greater than 3% Pn, the phase angle errors of suitable protection class current transformers will not result in any risk of mal-operation or failure to operate.
4.5.1
Protection class current transformers For less sensitive power function settings (>3%Pn), the phase current input of the P340 should be driven by a correctly loaded class 5P protection current transformer. To correctly load the current transformer, its VA rating should match the VA burden (at rated current) of the external secondary circuit through which it is required to drive current.
4.6
Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to a kneepoint voltage The suitability of an IEC standard protection class current transformer can be checked against the kneepoint voltage requirements specified previously in Section X. If, for example, the available current transformers have a 15VA 5P 10 designation, then an estimated kneepoint voltage can be obtained as follows:
Vk
Where: Vk VA ALF In = Rct = = = =
15 10 + 10 5 0.2 5 40V
Required kneepoint voltage Current transformer rated burden (VA) Accuracy limit factor
Current transformer secondary rated current (A) Resistance of current transformer secondary winding ()
If Rct is not available, then the second term in the above equation can be ignored. Example: 400/5A, 15VA 5P 10, Rct = 0.2
Chapter 3 Relay Description
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 3 Contents 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 13 13 14
1. 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.5 2.6 2.7 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 4. 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW Hardware overview Processor board Input module Power supply module RTD board IRIG-B board Software overview Real-time operating system System services software Platform software Protection and control software Disturbance recorder HARDWARE MODULES Processor board Internal communication buses Input module Transformer board Input board Power supply module (including output relays) Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface Output relay board RTD board IRIG-B board MECHANICAL LAYOUT RELAY SOFTWARE Real-time operating system System services software Platform software Record logging Settings database Database interface Protection and control software Overview - protection and control scheduling Signal processing Programmable scheme logic Event, fault and maintenance recording Disturbance recorder SELF TESTING AND DIAGNOSTICS Start-up self testing System boot Initialisation software Platform software initialisation and monitoring Continuous self testing
Section 1.
1.1
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Hardware overview The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of an assemblage of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the users requirements. The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:
1.1.1
Processor board The processor board performs all calculations for the relay and controls the operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also contains and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces).
1.1.2
Input module The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and digital input signals into a format suitable for processing by the processor board. The standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board to provide electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue to digital conversion and the isolated digital inputs.
1.1.3
Power supply module The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the RS485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a second board the power supply module contains the relays which provide the output contacts.
1.1.4
RTD board This optional board can be used to process the signals from up to 10 resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) to measure the winding and ambient temperatures.
1.1.5
IRIG-B board This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC60870 communication only. All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from the input module to the processor. Figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the flow of information between them.
Alarm, event, fault & maintenance records
Present values of all settings
Executable software code & data, setting database data
Default settings & parameters, language text, software code
Battery backed-up SRAM
E2PROM
SRAM
Flash EPROM
Front LCD panel
RS232 Front comms port Parallel test port CPU
LEDs
Main processor board

Timing data
IRIG-B signal
IRIG-B board optional
Fibre optic rear comms port optional RTD board optional
Temperature data
RTD inputs (x10)
Serial data bus (sample data) Power supply, rear comms data, output relay status Parallel data bus Digital input values
Output relay contacts (x7)
Relay board
ADC
Input board
Power supply (3 voltages), rear comms data
Analogue input signals
Transformer board and Power supply board auxiliary transformer board
Power supply
Watchdog contacts
Field voltage
Rear RS485 communication port
Current & voltage inputs (up to 13)
Figure 1:
1.2
Relay modules and information flow

Software overview The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the realtime operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here:
Digital inputs (x8)
Output relays
Opto-isolated inputs
1.2.1
Real-time operating system The real-time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different parts of the relays software to operate within. To this end the software is split into tasks. The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the processing of these tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible for the exchange of information between tasks, in the form of messages.
1.2.2
System services software The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For example, the system services software controls the boot of the relays software from the non-volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the relays hardware and the rest of the relay software.
1.2.3
Platform software The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e. the front panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC60870-5-103) the platform software converts the information from the database into the format required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all settings changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control software.
1.2.4
Protection and control software The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks such as the disturbance recorder. The protection & control software interfaces with the platform software for settings changes and logging of records, and with the system services software for acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and digital opto-isolated inputs.
1.2.5
Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder software is passed the sampled analogue values and logic signals from the protection and control software. This software compresses the data to allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform software interfaces to the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored records.
Section 2.
HARDWARE MODULES
The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a separate function within the relays operation. This section describes the functional operation of the various hardware modules. 2.1 Processor Board The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor performs all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad and LEDs. The processor board is located directly behind the relays front panel which allows the LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for RS232 serial communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications controller (SCC). The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories, volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data storage as required during the processors calculations. The nonvolatile memory is sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for nonvolatile storage of software code and text together with default settings, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance, event ,fault and maintenance record data, and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the storage of configuration data, including the present setting values. 2.2 Internal Communication Buses The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves. The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable. 2.3 Input Module The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board(s) and the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module of P342 consists of two PDBs; the main input board and the transformer board. This relay provides four voltage inputs and five current inputs. The P343 input module contains an additional transformer board, providing a total of four voltage inputs and eight current inputs.
2.3.1
Transformer board The standard transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up to five current transformers (CTs). The auxiliary transformer board adds up to four more CTs. The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and wiring options) and the voltage inputs can be specified for either 110V or 440V nominal voltage (order option). The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relays electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise.
2.3.2
Input board The main input board is shown as a block diagram in Figure 2. It provides the circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the samples to the main processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The AD converter provides 16-bit resolution and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are optically isolated on this board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage to the relay's internal circuitry.
Up to 9 current inputs
Up to 9 CT Diffn to single Low pass filter Calibration E2 PROM Trigger from processor board Parallel bus CT VT
4 voltage inputs
VT 4
Transformer board Input board
Up to 9 Up to 9 Buffer Sample control Serial sample data bus
Diffn to single
Diffn to single
16:1 Multiplexer
Optical isolator
Diffn to single Low pass filter 16-bit ADC Serial interface
Anti-alias filters
Low pass filter
Low pass filter
4 Noise filter 8 Noise filter
8 digital inputs
Optical isolator
Parallel bus
Buffer
Figure 2:
Main input board
The signal multiplexing arrangement provides for 16 analogue channels to be sampled. This allows for up to 9 current inputs and 4 voltage inputs to be accommodated. The 3 spare channels are used to sample 3 different reference voltages for the purpose of continually checking the operation of the multiplexer and the accuracy of the A-D converter. The sample rate is maintained at 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform by a logic control circuit which which is driven by the frequency tracking function on the main processor board. The calibration E2PROM holds the calibration coefficients which are used by the processor board to correct for any amplitude or phase error introduced by the transformers and analogue circuitry. The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input signals. The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as the transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relays electronics from the power system environment. A 48V field voltage supply is provided at the back of the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs. The input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted by the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board which contains the same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main input board, but does not contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which are provided on the main input board. 2.4 Power Supply Module (including output relays) The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input and output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an RS485 communication interface. 2.4.1 Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface) One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in table 1 below.
Nominal dc range 24/48V 48/125V 110/250V
Nominal ac range dc only 30/100 Vrms 100/240 Vrms
Table 1:
Power supply options

The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, 16V for the analogue electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils and the RTD board if fitted. All power supply voltages
including the 0V earth line are distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital inputs. The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the RS485 communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The RS485 interface is used with the relays rear communication port to provide communication using one of either Courier, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols. The RS485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output relay board which is connected to the parallel bus. The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed which are driven by the main processor board. These are provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state. 2.4.2 Output relay board The output relay board holds seven relays, three with normally open contacts and four with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays state is written to or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than seven output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay boards. Each additional relay board provides a further seven output relays. 2.5 RTD board The RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) board is an order option. It is used to monitor the temperature readings from up to ten PT100 RTDs which are each connected using a 3-wire connection. The board is powered from the 22V power rail that is used to drive the output relays. The RTD board includes two redundant channels which are connected to high stability resistors to provide reference readings. These are used to check the operation of the RTD board. The temperature data is read by the processor via the parallel data bus, and is used to provide thermal protection of the generator windings. 2.6 IRIG-B Board The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate timing reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay. The timing information is used to synchronise the relays internal real-time clock to an accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event, fault maintenance and disturbance records. The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the RS485 electrical connection (IEC60870 only). 2.7 Mechanical Layout The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to
reduce impedance paths and spring clips are used to ground the module metalwork. Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data communication. Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relays CT inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the board is removed. The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and 12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
Section 3.
RELAY SOFTWARE
The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this chapter. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections: the real-time operating system the system services software the platform software the protection & control software This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of the relay. Figure 3 shows the structure of the relay software.
Protection & Control Software Disturbance recorder task Protection task Platform Software Fourier signal processing Protection algorithms Event, fault, disturbance, maintenance record logging Protection & control settings Settings database Sampling function copies samples into 2 cycle buffer Remote communications interface - Modbus Remote communications interface IEC60870-5-103 Measurements and event, fault & disturbance records
Programmable & fixed scheme logic
Supervisor task
Control of output contacts and programmable LEDs
Front panel interface - LCD & keypad Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD, LEDs, front & rear comms ports. Self-checking maintenance records
Local & Remote communications interface - Courier
Sample data & digital logic inputs
System services software
Relay hardware
Figure 3:
Relay software structure
3.1
Real-time operating system The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in part for controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use of operating system messages.
3.2
System services software As shown in figure 3, the system services software provides the interface between the relays hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up.
3.3
Platform software The platform software has three main functions: to control the logging of all records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms and event, fault, disturbance and maintenance records. to store and maintain a database of all of the relays settings in non-volatile memory. to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relays user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103).
3.3.1
Record logging The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the platform software. The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a maintenace record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the system services or the protection software functions. See also the section on supervision and idagnostics later in this chapter.
3.3.2
Settings database The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings. The settings are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. The platform softwares management of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature is employed to avoid confusion between different
parts of the software during a setting change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, the platform software operates a scratchpad in SRAM memory. This allows a number of setting changes to be made in any order but applied to the protection elements, disturbance recorder and saved in the database in E2PROM, at the same time (see also chapter 1 on the user interface). If a setting change affects the protection & control task, the database advises it of the new values. 3.3.3 Database interface The other function of the platform software is to implement the relays internal interface between the database and each of the relays user interfaces. The database of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relays user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface. 3.4 Protection & control software The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to communicate with both the system services software and the platform software as well as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible protection response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and the platform software. 3.4.1 Overview - protection & control scheduling After initialisation at start-up, the protection & control task is suspended until there are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is controlled by a sampling function which is called by the system services software and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a two-cycle buffer. The protection & control software resumes execution when the number of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P342 and P343 generator protection relays, the protection task is executed four times per cycle, i.e. after every 6 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle used by the relay. However, the protection elements are split into groups so that different elements are processed each time, with every element being processed at least once per cycle. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other software tasks to take place. 3.4.2 Signal processing The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it is registered with the protection & control software. The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting a change in the measured signals phase angle. The calculated value of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the
protection & control task. When the protection & control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements algorithms. The samples from the input module are also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering purposes. 3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g. protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The fixed scheme logic provides the relays standard protection schemes. The PSL itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear. The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection & control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs. This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design. However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system, and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support package MiCOM S1. 3.4.4 Event, fault & maintenance recording A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal is used to indicate that an event has taken place. When this happens, the protection &
control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisors buffer. This means that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisors buffer is full before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM. If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information. Maintenance records are created in a similar manner with the supervisor task instructing the platform software to log a record when it receives a maintenance record message. However, it is possible that a maintenance record may be triggered by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to successfully store a maintenance record, depending on the nature of the problem. See also the section on self supervision & diagnostics later in this chapter. 3.4.5 Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection & control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection & control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data.
Section 4.
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS
The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or fault occurs within the relays hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a reboot. This involves the relay being out of service for a short period of time which is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay being extinguished and the watchdog contact at the rear operating. If the restart fails to resolve the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. Again this will be indicated by the LED and watchdog contact. If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store a maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM to allow the nature of the problem to be notified to the user. The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and
secondly a continuous self-checking operation which checks the operation of the relays critical functions whilst it is in service. 4.1 Start-up self-testing The self-testing which is carried out when the relay is started takes a few seconds to complete, during which time the relays protection is unavailable. This is signalled by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay which will illuminate when the relay has passed all of the tests and entered operation. If the testing detects a problem, the relay will remain out of service until it is manually restored to working order. The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows: 4.1.1 System boot The integrity of the flash EPROM memory is verified using a checksum before the program code and data stored in it is copied into SRAM to be used for execution by the processor. When the copy has been completed the data then held in SRAM is compared to that in the flash EPROM to ensure that the two are the same and that no errors have occurred in the transfer of data from flash EPROM to SRAM. The entry point of the software code in SRAM is then called which is the relay initialisation code. 4.1.2 Initialisation software The initialisation process includes the operations of initialising the processor registers and interrupts, starting the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to determine whether the software is still running), starting the real-time operating system and creating and starting the supervisor task. In the course of the initialisation process the relay checks: the status of the battery. the integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault and disturbance records. the voltage level of the field voltage supply which is used to drive the optoisolated inputs. the operation of the LCD controller. the watchdog operation. At the conclusion of the initialisation software the supervisor task begins the process of starting the platform software. 4.1.3 Platform software initialisation & monitoring In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held in E2PROM with a checksum, the operation of the real-time clock, and the IRIGB board if fitted. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of data; the presence and healthy condition of the input board is checked and the analogue data acquisition system is checked through sampling the reference voltage. At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the relay is entered into service and the protection started-up.
4.2
Continuous self-testing When the relay is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of its hardware and software. The checking is carried out by the system services software (see section on relay software earlier in this chapter) and the results reported to the platform software. The functions that are checked are as follows: the flash EPROM containing all program code and language text is verified by a checksum. the code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the corresponding data in flash EPROM to check for data corruption. the SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified with a checksum. the E2PROM containing setting values is verified by a checksum. the battery status. the level of the field voltage. the integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and the relay contacts, is checked by the data acquisition function every time it is executed. The operation of the analogue data acquisition system is continuously checked by the acquisition function every time it is executed, by means of sampling the reference voltage on a spare multiplexed channel. the operation of the RTD board is checked by reading the temperature indicated by the reference resistors on the two spare RTD channels. the operation of the IRIG-B board is checked, where it is fitted, by the software that reads the time and date from the board. In the unlikely event that one of the checks detects an error within the relays subsystems, the platform software is notified and it will attempt to log a maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM. If the problem is with the battery status, the RTD board or the IRIG-B board, the relay will continue in operation. However, for problems detected in any other area the relay will initiate a shutdown and re-boot. This will result in a period of up to 5 seconds when the protection is unavailable, but the complete restart of the relay including all initialisations should clear most problems that could occur. As described above, an integral part of the start-up procedure is a thorough diagnostic self-check. If this detects the same problem that caused the relay to restart, i.e. the restart has not cleared the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. This is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay, which will extinguish, and the watchdog contact which will operate.
Chapter 4 Technical Data
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 4 Contents 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 4. 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.1.13 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 5. 5.1
RATINGS Currents Voltages Auxiliary voltage Frequency Logic inputs Output relay contacts Field voltage Loop through connections Wiring requirements BURDENS Current circuit Voltage circuit Auxiliary supply Optically-isolated inputs ACCURACY Reference conditions Measurement accuracy Protection accuracy Influencing quantities High voltage withstand IEC 60255-5: 1977 Dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5: 1997 rear terminal only Impulse Insulation resistance ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE Electrical environment DC supply interruptions IEC 60255-11:1979 AC ripple on DC supply IEC 60255-11:1979 Disturbances on AC supply - EN 61000-4-11:1994 High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1998 Fast transient IEC 60255-22-4:1992 and IEC 60801-4:1988 Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2:1989 and IEC 60801-2:1991 Conducted emissions EN 55011:1991 Radiated emissions EN 55011:1991 Radiated immunity IEC 60255-22-3:1989 and IEC 60801-3:1984 Conducted immunity EN 50141:1993 Surge immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995 EMC compliance Power frequency interference - Electricity Association (UK) Atmospheric environment Temperature IEC 60255-6:1988 Humidity IEC 60068-2-3:1969 Enclosure protection IEC 60529:1989 Pollution degree IEC 61010-1: 1990 Mechanical environment Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993 ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS ANSI/ IEEE C37.9: 1989
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 4 Contents 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
5.2 5.3 6. 6.1 7. 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.11.1 7.11.2 7.12 7.12.1 7.12.2 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.22 7.23 8. 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 9. 9.1
ANSI /IEEE C37.90.1: 1989 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2: 1995 SAFETY Low voltage (safety and insulation) directive PROTECTION SETTING RANGES Generator differential protection (87G) (P343) Setting ranges Time delay settings 2-Stage non-directional overcurrent (50/51) Restricted earth fault (low impedance) SBEF and SET time delay characteristics 2-Stage non-directional earth fault (50N/51N) Setting ranges Time delay settings Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N) Setting ranges Time delay settings Sensitive directional earth fault (67N) Earth fault protection of Petersen coil earthed systems 100% stator earth fault (P343) Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) Under impedance (21) Under voltage (27) Level settings Under voltage protection time delay characteristics Over voltage Level settings Over voltage protection time delay characteristics Under frequency (81U) Over frequency (81O) Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R/32L/32O) Field failure (40) Negative phase sequence thermal (46) Volts/Hz (24) Unintentional energisation at standstill (dead machine) (P343) Voltage transformer supervision Resistive temperature detectors Nominal frequency Breaker fail timers (TBF1 and TBF2) CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS Circuit breaker state monitoring Circuit breaker condition monitoring Maintenance alarm settings Lock-out alarm settings INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES CT and VT ratio settings
Section
1.1
1.
RATINGS
Currents In = 1A or 5A ac rms. Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral input of each winding sharing one terminal.
CT Type Standard Sensitive Duration Continuous rating 10 seconds 1 second 1.2 Voltages
Operating range 0 to 64In 0 to 2In Withstand 4In 30In 100In
Maximum rated voltage relate to earth 300Vdc or 300Vrms. Nominal Voltage 100 - 120V ph-ph rms 380 - 480V ph-ph rms Duration Continuous rating (2Vn) 10 seconds (2.6Vn) 1.3 Auxiliary voltage The relay is available in three auxiliary voltage versions, these are specified in the table below: Nominal Ranges 24 - 48V dc 48 - 110V dc (30 - 100 V ac rms) ** 110 - 250V dc (100 - 240V ac rms) ** Operative dc range 19 to 65V 37 to 150V 87 to 300V Operative ac range 24 to 110V 80 to 265V Short term above Vn 0 to 200V ph-ph rms 0 to 800V ph-ph rms Withstand (Vn = 100/120V) 240Vph - ph rms 312Vph - ph rms Withstand (Vn = 380/480V) 880Vph - ph rms 1144Vph - ph rms
** rated for AC or DC operation.
1.4
Frequency The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50 - 60Hz, the operate range is 45Hz - 65Hz.
1.5
Logic inputs All the logic inputs are independent and isolated, relay type P342 provide 8 inputs, 16 inputs are provided by the P343. Rating Logical off Logical on 0V dc 50V dc Range 0 to 12V dc 25 to 60V dc
Higher voltages can be used in conjunction with an external resistor, value of the resistor is determined by the following equation: Resistor = (Required input level - 50) x 200 1.6 Output relay contacts Make & carry Carry Break 30A for 3s 250A for 30ms 5A continuous dc: dc: ac: ac: 50W resistive 25W inductive (L/R = 40ms) 1250VA 1250VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)
Maxima: Loaded contact: Unloaded contact: Watchdog Contact Break
5A and 300V 10,000 operation minimum 100,000 operations minimum
dc: 30W resistive dc: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms) ac: 375VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7)
The maximum number of output relays that should be configured to be permenantly energised is 50% of those available (minimum 4). 1.7 Field voltage The field voltage provided by the relay is nominally 48V dc with a current limit of 112mA. The operating range shall be 40V to 60V with an alarm raised at <35V.
1.8
Loop through connections Terminals D17 - D18 and F17 - F18 are internally connected together for convenience when wiring, maxima 5A and 300V.
1.9
Wiring requirements The requirements for the wiring of the relay and cable specifications are detailed in the installation section of the Operation Guide (Volume 2 Chapter 2).
Section 2.
2.1
BURDENS
Current circuit CT burden (at nominal current) 1A 5A <0.1 <0.02
2.2
Voltage circuit Reference voltage (Vn) Vn = 100 - 120V Vn = 380 - 480V <0.02VA rms at 110V <0.1VA rms at 440V
2.3
Auxiliary supply Case size Size 8 Size 12 Nominal* 15W 18W Maximum** 20W 30W
* Nominal is with 50% of the optos energised and one relay per card energised ** Maximum is with all optos and all relays energised. 2.4 Optically-isolated inputs DC Supply 5mA burden per input. (Current drawn at minimum voltage). 2.5mA at minimum voltage (30V).
Section 3.
ACCURACY
For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is 2.5% unless otherwise specified. If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracy is valid over the full setting range. 3.1 Reference conditions Quantity General Ambient temperature Atmospheric pressure Relative humidity Input energising quantity Current Voltage Frequency Auxiliary supply In Vn 50 or 60Hz DC 48V or 110V AC 63.5V or 110V Settings Time multiplier setting Time dial Phase angle 3.2 Measurement accuracy Quantity Current Voltage Frequency Phase Range 1.0 In 1.0 Vn 5 - 70Hz 0 - 360 Accuracy 1% 1% 0.025Hz 2% Reference value 1.0 10 0 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 20 C 86kPa to 106kPa 45 to 75 % 2C Reference conditions Test tolerance
3.3
Element
_
Range +5% +10% Instantaneous 30ms Greater of +2% or 50ms IDMT +5% or 40ms Greater of +2% or 20ms Greater of +2% or 50ms IDMT +5% or 40ms Greater of +2% or 50ms IDMT +5% or 40ms
_
Trigger 0.95 Is + 10%
Reset
Time Accuracy
Generator differential protection Is1 bias characteristic 2 to 20 Is [1] - 95 to + 95 2 to 20 Is [1] 2 to 20 Is [2] 0.5 - 25V 2.0 - 100V
_ Accuracy: +10% at RCA +90 DT: Is+5% IDMT: 1.05 Is+5%
Phase overcurrent elements (I> & I>>) Accuracy: +2 1 0.95 Is + 5% 0.95 Is + 5% DT: Is+5% IDMT: 1.05 Is+5%
DT: Is+5% 0.95 Is + 5% IDMT: 1.05 Is+5%
Protection accuracy
Relay characteristic angle
Earth fault measuring elements (IN >, IREF>)
Earth fault measuring elements (ISEF>)
Zero sequence voltage polarisation (Vop>) Vn = 100/120 V Vn = 380/440 V 0.5 - 25V 2.0 - 100V 0.08 - 1.0 In
_
Negative sequence polarisation: Voltage threshold (V2p>) Vn = 100/120 V Vn = 380/440 V Accuracy: +2 Accuracy: +2 +5% Accuracy: +2 DT: Is+5% IDMT: 1.05 Is+5% Zs +5%
Negative sequence polarisation: Voltage threshold (V2p>)
0.95 Is + 5%
1.05%Vs +5%
100% stator earth fault (3VN3H >)
Greater of +2% or 50ms +5% 0.95 Is + 5% 0.95 Is + 5% Above setting: 10ms or less Below setting: 15ms or less Greater of +2% or 50ms IDMT +5% or 40ms Greater of +2% or 50ms
Under Current elements (I<, I0<) 0.2 - 1.2 In

_ _
Voltage dependent overcurrent
Under impedance (Z<)
Under voltage elements (V<) Vn = 100/120 V Vn = 380/440 V 10 - 120V 40 - 440V 60 - 185V 360 - 680V
_
DT: Is+5% 1.05Vs + 5% IDMT: 0.95Vs+5% Greater of +2% or 50ms IDMTf +5% or 40ms Greater of +2% or 50ms IDMT +5% or 40ms Greater of +2% or 50ms 0.95 + 5% 0.95 + 5% 0.95 + 5% 0.95 + 5% Greater of +2% or 50ms Greater of +2% or 50ms Greater of +2% or 50ms Greater of +2% or 50ms Greater of +2% or 50ms 0.95 + 5%
1.05 +5%
Over voltage elements (V>&V>>) Vn = 100/120 V Vn = 380/440 V DT: Is+5% IDMT: 1.05Vs+5% 0.95Vs + 10% < +0.025 Hz +5% +5% +5%
_ _ _ _ _
Under/over frequency
Reverse power (-P>), over power (P>)
Field failure
Negative phase sequence thermal (I2>, I2>>) +5% To be determined +1 +5% +5% DT: Is+5% IDMT: 1.05Vs+5%
Volts / Hz Rate of change of frequency
Voltage vector shift

_
Unintentional energisation at standstill (I>) (V>) 1 - 50V 4 - 200V 0 -360 2 to 20 Is [1] 2 to 20 Is [1] 0 to 10s
_
Greater of +2% or 50ms Greater of +2% or 50ms IDMT +5% or 40ms
0.95Vs + 5%
_ _ _
Residual over voltage elements Vn = 100/120 V Vn = 380/440 V Directional operating boudary
Greater of +2% or 50ms

_ _ _ _
Transient overreach
Realy overshoot
Accuracy: +2 <5% (for a system X/R of up to 90) <50ms
Breaker fail timers
Greater of +2% or 50ms 1

_
Temperature protection
[1] or 16 In, whichever is the smaller [2] or 2 In, whichever is the smaller
3.4
Influencing quantities No additional errors will be incurred for any of the following influencing quantities:
Quantity Environmental Temperature Mechanical (Vibration, Shock, Bump, Seismic)
Operative range (typical only) -25C to +55C According to IEC 60255-21-1:1988 IEC 60255-21-2:1988 IEC 60255-21-3:1995 Operative range 5 Hz to 70 Hz 5% over the range 2nd to 17th 0.8 LV to 1.2 HV (dc) 0.8 LV to 1.1 HV (ac) 12% Vn with a frequency of 2.fn 0 to 360 No offset to fully offset -90 to + 90 No operation with OC elements set to 35% of peak anticipated inrush level.
Quantity Electrical Frequency Harmonics (single) Auxiliary voltage range Aux. supply ripple Point on wave of fault waveform DC offset of fault waveform Phase angle Magnetising inrush
3.5 3.5.1
High voltage withstand IEC60255-5:1977 Dielectric withstand IEC60255-5:1997 Rear terminals only 2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth. 2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit grouped together, and all other terminals. This includes the output contacts and loop through connections D17/D18 and F17/F18. 1.5kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output relays. 1.0kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover and watchdog output relays.
3.5.2
Impulse The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 0.5J across: Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together. Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together.
Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts. 3.5.3 Insulation resistance The insulation resistance is greater than 100 M at 500Vdc.
Section 4.
ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE
The product complies with the following specifications: 4.1 4.1.1 Electrical environment DC supply interruptions IEC 60255-11:1979 The product will withstand a 20ms interruption in the auxiliary voltage in its quiescent condition without de-energisation. 4.1.2 AC ripple on DC Supply IEC 60255-11:1979 The product will operate with 12% AC ripple on the DC auxiliary supply without any additional measurement errors. 4.1.3 Disturbances on AC supply - EN61000-4-11 :1994 The products satisfies the requirements of EN61000-4-11 for voltage dips and short interruptions of 20ms. 4.1.4 High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1988 The product complies with Class III 2.5kV common mode and 1kV differential mode for 2 seconds at 1MHz with 200 source impedance, without any maloperations or additional measurement errors. 4.1.5 Fast transient IEC 60255-22-4:1992 & IEC 60801-4:1988 The product complies with all classes up to and including class IV/ 4kV without any mal-operations or additional measurement errors. Fast transient disturbances on power supply (common mode only) 4kV, 5ns rise time, 50 ns decay time, 5kHz repetition time, 15 ms burst, repeated every 300ms for 1 min in each polarity, with a 50 source impedance. 2kV, 5ns rise time, 50ns decay time, 5kHz repetition time, 15ms burst, repeated every 300ms for 1min in each polarity, with a 50 source impedance.
Fast transient disturbances on I/O signal, data and control lines (common mode only)
4.1.6
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2:1996 The product will withstand application of all discharge levels up to the following without mal-operation:
Class IV
15kV discharge in air to the user interface, display and exposed metal work.
Class III Level 3

4.1.7
8kV discharge in air to all communication ports. 6kV point contact discharge to any part of the front of the product without any mal-operations.
Conducted emissions EN 55011:1991 Group 1 Class A limits. 0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBV (quasi peak) 66dV (average). 0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBV (quasi peak) 60dV (average).
4.1.8
Radiated emissions EN 55011:1991 Group 1 Class A limits. 30 - 230MHz, 40dBV/m at 10m measurement distance. 230 - 1000MHz, 47dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
4.1.9
Radiated immunity C37.90.2:1995 25MHz to 1000MHz, zero and 100% square wave modulated. Field strength of 35V/m.
4.1.10 Conducted immunity EN50141:1993 Class III Class IV - 10Vrms @ 1kHz 80% am.- 0.15 to 80MHz. - 4kV peak, 1.2/50s between all groups and case earth. - 2kV peak, 1.2/5.0s between terminal of each group. 4.1.11 Surge immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995
4.1.12 EMC compliance Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route. Generic Standards EN 50081-2 :1994 and EN 50082-2 :1995 are used to establish conformity. 4.1.13 Power frequency interference - Electricity Association (UK) EA PAP Document, Environmental Test Requirements for Protection Relays and Systems Issue I, Draft 4.2.1 1995.
Class Length of comms circuit Unbalanced comms Vrms Balanced comms (Unbalance 1%) Vrms 0.005 0.05 0.5 5 Balanced comms (Unbalance 0.1%) Vrms 0.0005 0.005 0.05 0.5
1 2 3 4
1 to 10 metres 10 to 100 metres 100 to 1000 metres 1000 to 10,000m or >
0.5 5 50 500
4.2 4.2.1
Atmospheric environment Temperature IEC 60255-6:1988 Storage and transit 25C to +70C. Operating 25C to +55C. IEC60068-2-1:1990 Cold IEC60068-2-2: 1974 Dry heat
4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4
Humidity IEC 60068-2-3:1969 56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40C. Enclosure protection IEC 60529:1989 IP52 - Protected against dust and dripping water at 15 to the vertical. Pollution degree IEC 61010-1:1990 Normally only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, a tempory conductivity caused by condensation must be expected.
4.3 4.3.1
Mechanical environment Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Vibration response Class 2 - 1g Vibration endurance Class 2 - 2g.
4.3.2
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Shock response Class 2 - 10g Shock withstand Class 1 - 15g Bump Class 1 - 10g
4.3.3
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993 Class 2.
Section 5.
ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS
The products meet the ANSI/IEEE requirements as follows :5.1 ANSI / IEEE C37.9: 1989 Standards for relays and relay systems associated with electric power apparatus. 5.2 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1 : 1989 Surge withstand capability (SWC) tests for protective relays and relay systems :Oscillatory test - 1MHz to 1.5MHz, 2.5kV to 3.0kV, Fast transient test 4kV to 5kV 5.3 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.2 : 1995 Standard for withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic interference from transceivers. 35V/m , 25 to 1000MHz.
Section 6.
6.1
SAFETY
Low voltage (safety and insulation) directive The product shall be compliant with the low voltage (safety/insulation) directive EN61010-1:1993. Products are reviewed for compliance to the LV Directive.
Section 7.
7.1 7.1.1
PROTECTION SETTING RANGES
Generator differential protection (87G) {P343} Setting ranges Settings Mode Is1 k1 Is2 k2 Range Percentage bias / high impedance 0.05In - 0.5In 0 - 20% 1In - 5In 20 - 150% 0.01In 5% 0.1In 10% Step size
7.1.2
Time delay settings Instantaneous
7.2
2-Stage non-directional overcurrent (50/51) Settings 1st stage I>1 Characteristic DT TMS (IEC/UK) tRESET (IEC/UK) 2nd stage I>2 DT 0.08 - 10 In 0 to 100s 0.01 In 0.01s 0.08 - 4 In DT, SI(IEC), VI(IEC), EI(IEC), LTI(IEC), MI(IEEE), VI(IEEE), EI(IEEE), Inv(US), STI(US) 0 to 100s 0.025 to 1.2 0 to 100s 0.01 In 0.025 0.01s 0.01 In Range Step size
Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/ US curves as shown in the table below.
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
t=TX
K +L a (I /Is ) - 1
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
t=
Where t K I IS L T TD
T D 7
K +L a (I /Is ) - 1
= operation time = constant = measured current = current threshold setting = constant = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves) = Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves = Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
IDMT characteristics IDMT Curve description Standard inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Long time inverse Moderately inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Inverse Short time inverse Standard IEC IEC IEC UK IEEE IEEE IEEE US-C08 US-C02 K Constant 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.0515 19.61 28.2 5.95 0.02394 Constant 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 2 2 2 0.02 L Constant 0 0 0 0 0.114 0.491 0.1217 0.18 0.01694
Time multiplier settings for IEC/UK curves Setting TMS Range 0.025 to 1.2 Step Size 0.025
Time dial settings for IEEE/US curves Setting TD Range 0.5 to 15 Step Size 0.1
7.3
Restricted earth fault (low impedance) Setting K1 K2 Is1 Is2 Range 0 % to 20 % 0 % to 150 % 0.05 In to In 0.1 In to 1.5 In Step size 1 % (minimum) 1 % (minimum) 0.01 In 0.1 In
7.3.1
SBEF and SEF time delay characteristics The earth-fault measuring elements for SBEF and SEF shall be followed by an independently seletable time delay. These time delays have an extended range of 0 to 200s, but are otherwise identical to those of the phase overcurrent definite time delay. The reset time delay is the same as the phase overcurrent reset time.
7.4 7.4.1
2-Stage non-directional earth fault (50N/51N) Setting ranges Settings 1st stage I >1
N
Range
Step size
0.02 - 1.0 In
0.01 In
2nd stage I >2

N
0.02 - 10 In
0.01 In
7.4.2
Time delay settings Settings 1st stage Characteristic DT, SI(IEC), VI(IEC), EI(IEC), LTI(IEC), MI(IEEE), VI(IEEE), EI(IEEE), Inv(US), STI(US) 0 to 200s 0.025 to 1.2 0 to 100s 0 to 200s 0.01 In 0.025 0.01s 0.01s Range Step size
DT TMS (IEC/UK) tRESET (IEC/UK) 2nd stage DT
7.5 7.5.1
Neutral displacement / residual overvoltage (59N) Setting ranges Name VN> (Vn 100/120V) VN>> (Vn 100/120V) VN> (Vn 380/440V) VN>> (Vn 380/440V) Range 1 - 50V 1 - 50V 4 - 200V 4 - 200V Step Size 1V 1V 4V 4V
7.5.2
Time delay settings The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula :
t= K (M - 1)
Where, K = Time multiplier setting t = operating time in seconds M = Applied input voltage / relay setting voltage (Vs) Range TMS setting (K) DT reset setting 0.5 - 100s 0 - 100s Step Size 0.5 0.01s
Definite time and TMS setting ranges 7.6 Sensitive directional earth fault (67N) Settings Directionality IN> VN > RCA DT Range Always forward 0.005 to 0.1 In 0.5 to 22V (for Vn=100/120V) 2 to 88V (for Vn =380/440V) -95 to 95 0 to 200s 0.00025 In 0.5V 2V 1 0.01s Step size
7.7
Earth fault protection of Petersen Coil earthed systems Name P N> Range 0 - 20W (Rating = 1A, 100/120V) 0 - 100W (Rating = 5A, 100/120V) 0 - 80W (Rating = 1A, 380/440V) Step size 0.05W 0.25W 0.20W
7.8
100% Stator earth fault {P343} Settings Third harmonic neutral under voltage (VN3H<) Under voltage inhibit t Range 0.3 - 20V (for Vn=100/120V) 1.2 - 80V (for Vn /440V) 30 - 120V (for Vn=100/120V) 120 - 480V (for Vn=380/440V) 0 - 100s Step size 0.1V 0.4V 1V 4V 0.01s
7.9
Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) Settings Operating mode Current threshold Is Vs (for voltage controlled) Vs1 (for voltage restrained) Vs2 (for voltage restrained) K factor DT TMS tRESET Range Voltage controlled/voltage restrained 0.8 - 4 In 20 - 120V (for Vn = 100/120V) 80 - 440V (for Vn = 380/440V) 20 - 120V (for Vn = 100/120V) 80 - 440V (for Vn = 380/440V) 20 - 120V (for Vn = 100/120V) 80 - 440V (for Vn = 380/440V) 0.25 - 1.00 0 -100s 0.025 - 1.2 0 - 100s 0.01 In 1V 4V 1V 4V 1V 4V 0.05 0.01s 0.025 0.01s Step size
Timer accuracy should be <2% (or 50ms whichever is greater).
7.10
Under impedance (21) Settings Z< Range 2 - 120 W (for Vn=100/120V, In=1A) 0.4 - 24 W (for Vn=100/120V, In=5A) 8 - 480 W (for Vn=380/440V, In=1A) 1.6 - 96 W (for Vn=380/440V, In=5A) 0 - 100s Step size 0.5W 0.1W 2W 0.4W 0.1s
DT 7.11
Under voltage (27)
7.11.1 Level settings Name Vph - N<1 & Vph - ph<1 (Vn = 100/120V) Vph - N<1 & Vph - ph<1 (Vn = 380/440V) Vph - N<2 & Vph - ph<2 (Vn = 100/120V) Vph - N<2 & Vph - ph<2 (Vn = 380/440V) 40 - 480V 4V 10 - 120V 1V 40 - 480V 4V 10 - 120V 1V Range Step size
7.11.2 Under voltage protection time delay characteristics Under voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay. The first element have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay setting. Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input. The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula :
t=
Where,
K (1 - M)
K = Time multiplier setting t = operating time in seconds M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)
Range DT setting TMS Setting (K) 0 - 100s 0.5 - 100
Step size 0.1s 0.5
Definite time and TMS setting ranges. Timer accuracy should be <2% (or 50ms whichever is greater). 7.12 Over voltage (59) 7.12.1 Level settings Name Vph - N>1 & Vph - ph>1 (Vn = 100/120V) Vph - N>1 & Vph - ph>1 (Vn = 380/440V) Vph - N>2 & Vph - ph>2 (Vn = 100/120V) Vph - N>2 & Vph - ph>2 (Vn = 380/440V) 240 - 740V 4V 60 - 185V 1V 240 - 740V 4V 60 - 185V 1V Range Step Size
7.12.2 Over voltage protection time delay characteristics Over voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay. The first elements have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay setting. Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input. The inverse characteristics are given by the following formula :
t= K (M - 1)
Where, K = Time multiplier setting t = operating time in seconds M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)
Range DT setting TMS Setting (K) 0 - 100s 0.5 - 100s
Step size 0.1s 0.5
Definite time and TMS setting ranges 7.13 Under frequency (81U) Settings f (for all stages) t (for all stages) 7.14 Range 45 - 65 Hz 0 - 100s Step size 0.025 Hz 0.1s
Over frequency (81O) Settings f (for all stages) t (for all stages) Range 45 - 65 Hz 0 - 100s Step size 0.025 Hz 0.1s
7.15
Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O) Settings Stage 1 Mode -P> (reverse power) Range Enable/disable Reverse/low forward/over 4W - 40W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V) 16W - 160W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V) 70W - 200W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V) 280W - 800W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V) P< (low forward power) 4W - 40W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V) 16W - 160W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V) 70W - 200W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V) 280W - 800W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V) P> (over power) 4W - 300W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V) 16W - 1200W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V) 70W - 1500W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V) 280W - 6000W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V) DT DO Timer Stage 2 0 - 100s 0 - 10s 0.5W 2W 2.5W 6W 0.5W 2W 2.5W 6W 0.5W 2W 2.5W 6W 0.1s 0.1s Step size
Same as Stage 1
7.16
Field failure (40) Mho characteristic settings (secondary ohms) for Vn = 100/120V: Settings Mho offset (-Xa1, -Xa2) Diameter (Xb1, Xb2) t1, t2 tDO1, tDO2 Linear characteristic alarm time (t) Range 0 - 40 (for In = 1A) 0 - 8 (for In = 5A) 25 - 325 (for In = 1A) 5 - 65 (for In = 5A) 0 - 100s 0 - 10s 0 - 100s Steps 0.5 0.1 1 0.2 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Mho characteristic settings (secondary ohms) for Vn = 380/440V: Settings Mho offset -Xa Diameter Xb Range 0 - 160 (for In = 1A) 0 - 32 (for In = 5A) 100 - 1300 (for In = 1A) 20 - 260 (for In = 5A) Linear characteristic settings: Settings 7.17 Range 15 - 75
0 0
Steps 2 0.4 4 0.8
Steps 10
Negative phase sequence thermal (46) Settings Alarm status I2> (alarm) t> Trip status I2>> (trip) K Kreset tmax tmin Range Enable/disable 0.03 - 0.5 In 0 - 60s Enable/disable 0.05 - 0.5 In 2 - 40s 2 - 40s 500 - 2000s 0.25 - 40s 0.01 In 0.1s 0.1s 10s 0.25s 0.01 In 0.1s Steps
7.18
Volts/Hz (24) Settings V/f (trip) V/f (alarm) Operating mode TMS (trip) DT (trip) DT (alarm) Range 1.5 - 3.5 V/Hz (for Vn=100/120V) 6.0 - 14 V/Hz (for Vn=380/440V) 1.5 - 3.5 V/Hz (for Vn=100/120V) 6.0 - 14 V/Hz (for Vn=380/440V) Standard inverse/definite time 1 - 63 0 - 100s 0 - 100s 1 0.1s 0.1s Step size 0.01 V/Hz 0.04 V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz 0.04 V/Hz
Note: V/Hz setting refers to secondary voltage and the nominal frequency. 7.19 Unintentional energisation at standstill (Dead machine) {P343} Settings I> Vph-ph< tPU tDO 7.20 Range 0.08 to 4 In 30 to 120V (for Vn=100/120V) 120 to 440V (for Vn=400/440V) 0 to 10s 0 to 10s Step size 0.1 In 0.01V 0.04V 0.1s 0.1s
Voltage transformer supervision Name Voltage threshold (V2) Phase overvoltage Range 10V (100/120V) 40V (380/440V) P.U. 30V, D.O. 10V (100/120V) P.U.120V, D.O.40V (380/440V) 0.08 In to 32 In (Model 1) 0.08 In to 10 In (Models 2&3) 0.1 In 0.1 In 1.0 - 10s Step size Fixed Fixed
Phase overcurrent Superimposed current Current threshold (I2) Timer
0.01 In Fixed Fixed 0.1s
7.21
Resistive temperature detectors Setting RTD# alarm temperature (T# alarm) RTD# trip temperature (T# trip) Temperature time delay (tT# alarm) Temperature time delay (tT# trip) Min 0C 0C 0s 0s Max 200C 200C 100 s 100 s Step 1C 1C 1s 1s
7.22
Nominal frequency Setting Frequency Range 50 to 60Hz Step size 10Hz
7.23
Breaker fail timers (TBF1 and TBF2) These timers can be enabled or disabled via a setting. Timer tBF1 tBF2 Setting range 0 to 10 seconds 0 to 10 seconds Step 0.01 0.01
The timers are reset by:
undercurrent elements operating, or initiating element drop-off (loss of external initiating signal), or circuit breaker open auxiliary contact. (if current operation / external device
is not applicable)
Section 8.
8.1
CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS
Circuit breaker state monitoring Circuit breaker state monitoring shall be based on the monitoring of discrepancy between circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b. If these contacts remain simultaneously open or simultaneously closed for >5s, then the trip circuit alarm shall be indicated.
8.2 8.2.1
Circuit breaker condition monitoring Maintenance alarm settings Name Operation threshold I threshold
x
Range 1- 10000 1000 - 2.5 x 10 5 - 500ms

12
Step size 1 1000 1ms
t threshold
8.2.2
Lock-out alarm settings Name Operation threshold Ix threshold t threshold Range 1- 10000 1000 - 2.5 x 1012 5 - 500ms Step size 1 1000 1ms
Section 9.
9.1
INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES
CT and VT ratio settings Primary range Current transformer step size Voltage transformer step size 1 - 30000 Amps 1 A 100 V - 1000 kV 1V Secondary range 1 or 5 Amps 100 - 440 V
Chapter 5 SCADA Communications
TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENAERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS
TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 5 Contents Page 1of 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14
1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.7 2.8 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
INTRODUCTION COURIER INTERFACE Courier protcol Front courier port Supported command set Relay courier database Setting changes Method 1 Method 2 Relay settings Setting transfer mode Event extraction Automatic event extraction Event types Event format Manual event record extraction Disturbance record extraction Programmable logic settings MODBUS INTERFACE Communication link Modbus function Response codes Register mapping Event extraction Manual selection Automatic extraction Record data Disturbance record extraction Manual selection Automatic extraction Record data Setting changes Password protection Control and support setting Protection and disturbance recorder settings IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE Physical connection and link layer Initialisation Time synchronisation Spontaneous events General interrogation Cyclic measurements Commands Test mode Disturbance records Blocking of monitor direction
Section 1.
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the remote interfaces of the MiCOM relay in enough detail to allow integration within a substation communication network. As has been outlined in earlier chapters the relay supports a choice of one of three protocols via the rear communication interface. This is in addition to the front serial interface which supports the Courier protocol. The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 relays can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection. For each of the three protocol options the supported functions/commands will be listed together with the database definition. The operation of standard procedures such as extraction of event, fault and disturbance records or setting changes will also be described. It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this chapter do not aim to fully detail the protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this information. This chapter serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol on the relay.
Section 2.
2.1
COURIER INTERFACE
Courier protocol Courier is an ALSTOM Protection and Control communication protocol. The concept of the protocol is that a standard set of commands are used to access a database of settings/data within the relay. This allows a generic master to be able to communicate with different slave devices. The application specific aspects are contained, i.e. the master station does not need to be preconfigured. Within the database itself rather than the commands used to interrogate it. The same protocol can be used via two physical links K-Bus or RS232; K-Bus is based on RS485 voltage levels and is synchronous, the RS232 interface uses IEC60870 FT1.2 (IEC60870) frame format. The relay supports an IEC60870 connection on the front, for one to one connection, this is not suitable for permanent connection. This interface uses a fixed baud rate, 11 bit frame and a fixed device address. The rear RS485 interface is used to provide a permanent connection for K-Bus and allows multi-drop connection. It should be noted that although K-Bus is based on RS485 voltage levels it is a synchronous protocol using FM0 encoding. It is not possible to use a standard RS232 to RS485 converter to convert IEC60870 to K-Bus. The following documentation should be referred to for a detailed description of the Courier protocol, command set and link description. R6509 K-Bus Interface Guide R6510 IEC60870 Interface Guide R6511 Courier Protocol R6512 Courier User Guide
2.2
Front courier port The front RS232 port supports the Courier protocol for one to one communication. It is designed for use during installation and commissioning/ maintenance and is not suitable for permanent connection. Since this interface will not be used to link the relay to a substation communication system some of the features of Courier are not implemented. These are as follows: Automatic extraction of Event Records: Courier Status byte does not support the Event flag Sent Event/Accept Event commands are not implemented Automatic extraction of Disturbance records: Courier Status byte does not support the Disturbance flag Busy Response Layer: Courier Status byte does not support the Busy flag, the only response to a request will be the final data Fixed Address: The address of the front Courier port is always 1, the Change Device address command is not supported. It should be noted that although automatic extraction of event and disturbance records is not supported it is possible to manually access this data via the front port.
2.3
Supported command set The following Courier commands are supported by the relay: Protocol Layer Reset Remote Link Poll Status Poll Buffer* Low Level Commands Send Event* Accept Event* Send Block Store Block Identifier Store Block Footer Menu Browsing Get Column Headings Get Column Text Get Column Values Get Strings Get Text Get Value Get Column Setting Limits
Setting Changes Enter Setting Mode Preload Setting Abort Setting Execute Setting Reset Menu Cell Set Value Control Commands Select Setting Group Change Device Address* Set Real Time Note: Commands indicated with a * are not supported via the front Courier port. 2.4 Relay courier database The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column. Appendix A contains the complete database definition for the relay for each cell location the following information is stated: Cell Text Cell Datatype Cell value Whether if the cell is settable, if so Minimum value Maximum value Step size Password Level required to allow setting changes String information (for Indexed String or Binary flag cells) 2.5 Setting changes (See Courier User Guide Chapter 9) Courier provides two mechanisms for making setting changes, both of these are supported by the relay. Either method can be used for editing any of the settings within the relay database. 2.5.1 Method 1 This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change: Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure
that setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this action. Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be returned. Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change. This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are required for each change. 2.5.2 Method 2 The Set Value command can be used to directly change a setting, the response to this command will be either a positive confirm or an error code to indicate the nature of a failure. This command can be used to implement a setting more rapidly then the previous method, however the limits are not extracted from the relay. This method is most suitable for off-line setting editors such as MiCOM S1. 2.5.3 Relay settings There are three categories of settings within the relay database Control and Support Disturbance Recorder Protection Settings Group Setting changes made to the control and support settings are implemented immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. Settings made to either the Disturbance recorder settings or the Protection Settings Groups are stored in scratchpad memory only and are not immediately implemented by the relay. To action setting changes made to these areas of the relay database the Save Changes cell in the Configuration column must be written to. This allows the changes to either be confirmed and stored within non-volatile memory or the setting changes to be aborted. Setting transfer mode If it is necessary to transfer all of the relay settings to or from the relay a cell within the Communication System Data column can be used. This cell (location BF03) when set to 1 makes all of the relay settings visible. Any setting changes made with the relay set in this mode are stored in scratchpad memory (including control and support settings). When the value of BF03 is set back to 0 any setting changes are confirmed and stored in non-volatile memory. 2.6 Event extraction Events can be extracted either automatically (rear port only) or manually (either Courier port). For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault/maintenance data if appropriate. The manual approach allows the user to select events,faults or maintenance data at random from the stored records.
2.5.4
2.6.1
Automatic event extraction (See Chapter X Courier User Guide) This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced, it is only supported via the rear Courier port. When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest, unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records and maintenance records. Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before.
2.6.2
Event types Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances: Change of state of output contact Change of state of opto input Protection element operation Alarm condition Setting Change Password entered/timed-out Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event) Maintenance record (Type 3 Courier Event)
2.6.3
Event format The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay: Cell Reference Timestamp Cell Text Cell Value Appendix B contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records and Maintenance records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields: Event extraction column Event number These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting which allows the fault/maintenance record to be selected.
This setting should be set to the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column. 2.6.4 Manual event record extraction Column 01 of the database can be used for manual viewing of event, fault and maintenance records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select by event number, or to directly select a fault record or maintenance record. Event Record selection (Row 01) - This cell can be set to a value between 0 to 249 to select which of the 250 stored events is selected, 0 will select the most recent record; 249 the oldest stored record. For simple event records (Type 0) cells 0102 to 0105 contain the event details. A single cell is used to represent each of the event fields. If the event selected is a fault or maintenance record (Type 3) then the remainder of the column will contain the additional information. Fault Record Selection (Row 05) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the details of the fault record selected. Maintenance Record Selection (Row F0) - This cell can be used to select a maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4 and operates in a similar way to the fault record selection. It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new event or fault occurs. 2.7 Disturbance record extraction The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible in a compressed format via the Courier interface. The records are extracted using column B4, it should be noted that cells required for extraction of uncompressed disturbance records are not supported. Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records. Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. It should be noted that the file extracted from the relay is in a compressed format, it will be necessary to use MiCOM S1 to de-compress this file and save the disturbance record in the COMTRADE format. As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide. The front Courier port does not support automatic extraction although disturbance record data can be extracted manually from this port.
2.8
Programmable logic settings The programmable logic settings can be uploaded from and downloaded to the relay using the block transfer mechanism defined in Chapter 12 of the Courier User Guide. The following cells are used to perform the extraction B204 Domain: Used to select either PSL settings (Upload or download) or PSL configuration data (Upload only) B208 Sub-Domain: Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be uploaded/downloaded. B20C Version: Used on a download to check the compatibility of the file to be downloaded with the relay. B21C Transfer Mode: Used to set-up the transfer process B120 Data Transfer Cell: Used to perform upload/download. The Programmable scheme logic settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from the relay using this mechanism. If it is necessary to edit the settings MiCOM S1 must be used as the data format is compressed. MiCOM S1 also performs checks on the validity of the settings before they are downloaded to the relay.
Section 3.
MODBUS INTERFACE
The Modbus interface is a master/slave protocol, it is defined by MODICON Inc by the following document: Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide 3.1 Communication link This interface also uses the rear RS485 port for communication using RTU mode communication rather than ASCII mode as this provides more efficient use of the communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is defined in page 7 of the Modbus Guide. The following parameters can be configured for this port using either the front panel interface or the front Courier port: Baud Rate Device Address Parity Inactivity Time 3.2 Modbus functions The following Modbus function codes are supported by the relay: 01 02 03 04 06 08 Read Coil Status Read Input Status Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Preset Single Register Diagnostics PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
11 12 16 01 02 03 04 06 16 3.3 Code 01 02
Fetch Communication Event Counter Fetch Communication Event Log Preset Multiple Registers 127 max Read status of output contacts (1xxxx addresses) Read status of opto inputs (2xxxx addresses) Read Setting values (4xxxx addresses) Read Measured values (3xxxx addresses) Write single setting value (4xxxx addresses) Write multiple setting values (4xxxx addresses) Modbus Description Illegal Function Code Illegal Data Address MiCOM Interpretation The function code transmitted is not supported by the slave The start data address in the request is not an allowable value. If any of the cells in the range to be written to cannot be accessed due to password protection then all changes within the request are discarded and this error response will be returned. Note: If the start address is correct but the range includes non implemented addresses this response is not produced A value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range. Other values transmitted within the same packet will be executed if inside range. The write command cannot be implemented due to the database being locked by another interface. This response is also produced if the relay software is busy executing a previous request.
These are interpreted by the MiCOM relay in the following way:
Response codes
03
Illegal Value
06
Slave Device Busy
3.4
Register mapping The relay supports the following memory page references:Memory Page 0xxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx 4xxxx Interpretation Read and write access of the Output Relays. Read only access of the Opto Inputs. Read only access of Data. Read and write access of Settings.
where xxxx represents the addresses available in the page (0 to 9999). Note that the extended memory file (6xxxx) is not supported. A complete map of the Modbus addresses supported by the relay is contained in Appendix XX of this service manual. 3.5 Event extraction The relay supports two methods of event extraction providing either automatic or manual extraction of the stored event, fault and maintenance records. 3.5.1 Manual selection There are three registers available to manually select stored records, there are also three read only registers allowing the number of stored records to be determined. 40100 - Select Event, 0 to 249 40101 - Select Fault, 0 to 4 40102 - Select Maintenance Record, 0 to 4 For each of the above registers a value of 0 represents the most recent stored record. The following registers can be read to indicate the numbers of the various types of record stored. 30100 - Number of stored records 30101 - Number of stored fault records 30102 - Number of stored maintenance records Each fault or maintenance record logged causes an event record to be created by the relay. If this event record is selected the additional registers allowing the fault or maintenance record details will also become populated. 3.5.2 Automatic extraction The automatic extraction facilities allow all types of record to be extracted as they occur. Event records are extracted in sequential order including any fault or maintenance data that may be associated with the event. The Modbus master can determine whether the relay has any events stored that have not yet been extracted. This is performed by reading the relay status register 30001. If the event bit of this register is set then the relay has unextracted events available. To select the next event for sequential extraction the master station writes a value of 1 to the record selection register 40400. The event data together with any fault/maintenance data can be read from the registers specified below. Once the data has been read the event record can be marked as having been read by writing a value of 2 to register 40400. 3.5.3 Record data The location and format of the registers used to access the record data is the same whether they have been selected using either of the two mechanisms detailed above. Event Record Data: 30103 to 30109 The presence of additional data for the event record is indicated by cell 30110, a value of 0 means that there is no additional data. 30110 = 1, fault record data can be read from 30111 to 30197
30110 = 2, maintenance record data can be read from 30198 to 30199 If a fault record or maintenance record is directly selected using the manual mechanism then the data can be read from the register ranges specified above, the event record data in cells 30103 to 30109 will not be available. It is possible using register 40401 to clear independently the stored relay event/fault and maintenance records. This register also provides an option to reset the relay indications, this has the same effect on the relay as pressing the clear key within the alarm viewer using the front panel menu. 3.6 Disturbance record extraction The relay provides facilities for both manual and automatic extraction of disturbance records. The two methods differ only in the mechanism for selecting a disturbance record, the method for extracting the data and the format of the data are identical. 3.6.1 Manual selection Each disturbance record has a unique identifier which increments for each stored record and resets at a value of 65535. The following registers can be used to determine the identifiers for the stored records 30800 - The number of stored disturbance records 30801 - The identifier for the oldest stored record A record can be selected by writing the required record identifier to register 40250. It is possible to read the timestamp of the selected record and in this way produce a list of all the stored records. 3.6.2 Automatic extraction The Modbus master station can determine the presence of unread disturbance records by polling register 30001. When the disturbance bit of this register is set disturbance records are available for extraction. To select the next disturbance record write a value of 3 to cell 40400. Once the disturbance record data has been read by the master station this record can be marked as having been read by writing a value of 4 to register 40400. 3.6.3 Record data The timestamp for a record selected using either of the above means can be read from registers 30390 to 30393. The disturbance record data itself is stored in a compressed format, due to the size of the disturbance record it must be read using a paging system. The number of pages required to extract a record will depend on the configured size of the record. When a record is first selected the first page of data will be available in registers 30803 to 30929 (the number of registers required for the current page can be read from register 30802, this will be 127 for all but the last page in the record). Once the first page has been read the next page can be selected by writing a value of 5 to register 40400. If this action is performed on the last page for the disturbance record an illegal value error response will be returned. This error response can be used by the Modbus master to indicate that the last page of the disturbance record has been read.
3.7
Setting changes The relay settings can be split into two categories: control and support settings disturbance record settings and protection setting groups Changes to settings within the control and support area are executed immediately. Changes to either the protection setting groups or the disturbance recorder are stored in a temporary area and must be confirmed before they are implemented. All the relay settings are edited via Modbus using 4xxxx addresses. The following points should be noted when settings are being edited: Settings implemented using multiple registers must be written to using a multi-register write operation. The first address for a multi-register write must be a valid address, if there are unmapped addresses within the range being written to then the data associated with these addresses will be discarded. If a write operation is performed with values that are out of range then the illegal data response will be produced. Valid setting values within the same write operation will be executed. If a write operation is performed attempting to change registers that require a higher level of password access than is currently enabled then all setting changes in the write operation will be discarded.
3.7.1
Password protection As described in the introduction to this service manual the relay settings can be subject to Password protection. The level of password protection required to edit a setting is indicated in relay setting database (Appendix A). Level 2 is the highest level of password access, level 0 indicates that no password is required for editing. The following registers are available to control Password protection: 40001&40002 40022 40023&40024 40025&40026 30008 Password Entry Default Password Level Setting to Change password level 1 Setting to Change password level 2
Can be read to indicate current access level
3.7.2 3.7.3
Control and support settings Control and support settings are executed immediately on the write operation. Protection and disturbance recorder settings Setting changes to either of these areas are stored in a scratchpad area and will not be used by the relay unless a confirm or to abort operation is performed. Register 40405 can be used to either to confirm or abort the setting changes within the scratchpad area. It should be noted that the relay supports four groups of protection settings. The Modbus addresses for each of the four groups are repeated within the following address ranges:
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
41000-42999 43000-44999 45000-46999 47000-48999
In addition to the basic editing of the protection setting groups the following functions are provided. Default values can be restored to a setting group or to all of the relay settings by writing to register 40402. It is possible to copy the contents of one setting group to another by writing the source group to register 40406 and the target group to 40407. It should be noted that the setting changes performed by either of the two operations defined above are made to the scratchpad area. These changes must be confirmed by writing to register 40405. The active protection setting groups can be selected by writing to register 40404. An illegal data response will be returned if an attempt is made to set the active group to one that has been disabled.
Section 4.
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported. The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface: Initialisation (Reset) Time Synchronisation Event Record Extraction General Interrogation Cyclic Measurements General Commands 4.1 Physical connection and link layer Two connection options are available for IEC60870-5-103, either the rear RS485 port or an optional rear fibre optic port. Should the fibre optic port be fitted the selection of the active port can be made via the front panel menu or the front Courier port, however the selection will only be effective following the next relay power up. For either of the two modes of connection it is possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel menu/front Courier. Following a change to either of these two settings a reset command is required to reestablish communications. 4.2 Initialisation Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands
(Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays transmit buffer. The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU: Manufacturer Name: ALSTOM The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, eg P141. In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also produce a power up event. 4.3 Time synchronisation The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/ no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data. If the relay clock is being synchronised using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to set the relay time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via the interface will cause the relay to create an event with the current date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronised internal clock. 4.4 Spontaneous events The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardized messages will not be sent. Events are categorised using the following information: Common Address Function Type Information number Appendix 1 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardized messages. For example if the relay produces starts and trips for four stages of overcurrent only two stages can be passed using the standardized messages. Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows each stage to be indicated. The table in Appendix 1 shows the common address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to the station address in order to pass these events. 4.5 General interrogation The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in Appendix 1.
4.6
Cyclic measurements The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). The rate at which the relay produces new measured values can be controlled using the Measurement Period setting. This setting can be edited from the front panel menu/front Courier port and is active immediately following a change. It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in Appendix 1.
4.7
Commands A list of the supported commands is contained in Appendix 1. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.
4.8
Test mode It is possible using either the front panel menu or the front Courier port to disable the relay output contacts to allow secondary injection testing to be performed. This is interpreted as test mode by the IEC60870-5-103 standard. An event will be produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous events and cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the relay is in test mode will have a COT of test mode.
4.9
Disturbance records The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the start of every GI cycle. Any attempt to extract disturbance record data from the relay (using ASDU 24) will result in the relay responding with ASDU 31 end of transmission of disturbance record with a Type of Order of abortion by the protection equipment.
4.10
Blocking of monitor direction The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.
MiCOM P342, P343 Generator Protection Relays Technical Guide
Appendix A Courier Database
TG8614A Volume 1 Appendix A Page 1 of 82
Appendix A
This Appendix is split into several sections, these are as follows: Menu Database for Courier, User Interface and Modbus Menu Datatype Definition Event Data for Courier, User Interface and Modbus IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide Internal Digital Signals Default Programmable Logic Menu database This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface, the front panel user interface and the Modbus interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Datatypes for Modbus and indexed strings for Courier and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also defined within this database. Note: Label V1 V2 V3 The following labels are used within the database Description Main VT Rating Checksync VT Rating NVD VT Rating Phase CT Rating Earth Fault CT Raing Sensitive CT Rating Mutual CT Rating Value 1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V) 1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V) 1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A08) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0A) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0C) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)
I1 I2 I3 I4
Menu datatype definition This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier and user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross reference to from the Menu Database using a G number. Event data This section of the Appendix specifies all the event information that can be produced by the relay. It details exactly how each event will be presented via the Courier, User and Modbus interfaces. IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability guide This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications Chapter of this Manual (Volume 1 Chapter 5).
Internal digital signals This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It isalso used to explicitly define protection events produced by the relay (see the Event Data section of this Appendix). Default programmable logic This section documents the default programmable logic for the various models of the relay. This default logic for each model of the relay is supplied with the MiCOM S1 Scheme Logic Editor PC support software. References Chapter 1 Introduction : User Interface operation and connections to relay Chapter 5 Communications: Overview of communication interfaces Courier User Guide R6512 Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems - Transmission Protocols Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
Menu Text SYSTEM DATA Language Password Sys Fn Links
UI
Courier Col Row 00 00 00 00 00 01 02 03
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Indexed String ASCII Password(4 chars) Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed Strings ASCII Text(16 chars) ASCII Text(16 chars) ASCII Text(32 chars) ASCII Text(7 chars) Unsigned Integer(8 bits) Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Unsigned Integer(16 bits)
G19 G20 G95 40001 40003 40002
G19 G20 G95
English AAAA 0
Setting Setting Setting
0 65 1
3 90 1
1 1 1
2 0 2
* * *
Sets only for interface being used Sets only for interface being used
Description Plant Reference Model Number Serial Number Frequency Comms Level Relay Address
00 00 00 00 00 00 00
04 05 06 08 09 0A 0B
G3 G3 G3 G3
40004 40012 30020 30044 40020
40011 40019 30035 30051
G3 G3 G3 G3 G1
MiCOM P34X ALSTOM
Setting Setting Data Data
32 32
163 163
1 1
2 2
* * * *
* * * * * * *
* * * * * * * Address of Rear Courier interface Address available via LCD Modbus Only (Relay Status)
50 2 255
Setting Data Setting
50
60
10
* *
255
N/A N/A Plant Status Control Status Active Group CB Trip/Close Software Ref. 1 Opto I/P Status 00 00 00 00 00 00 0C 0D 0E 10 11 20 Binary Flag(16 bits) Binary Flag(16 bits) Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Indexed String(2) ASCII Text(16 chars) Binary Flag(16 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Access Level Password Control Password Level 1 00 00 00 D0 D1 D2 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Unsigned Integer(16 bits) ASCII Password(4 chars) G1 G22 G20 G55
30001 30002 30004 30006 40021 30052 30007 30059
G26 G4 G5 G1 G55 G3 G8 No Operation
Data Data Data Data Command Data Data 0 2 1 1
* * * * * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* *
* *
Relay O/P Status
00
21
30008
30009
G9
Data
Alarm Status
00
22
30011
30012
G96
Data
30010 40022 40023 40024
G1 G22 G20 2 AAAA
Data Setting Setting 0 65 2 90 1 1 2 1
* * *
* * *
* * * Sets only for interface being used Sets only for interface being used
Menu Text SPassword Level 2 VIEW RECORDS
UI
Courier Col Row 00 01 D3 00
Data type ASCII Password(4 chars)
Strings G20
Modbus Start 40025
Address End 40026
Modbus Datagroup G20
Default Setting AAAA
Cell Type Setting
Min 65
Max 90
Step 1
Password Level 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * *
Comment Sets only for interface being used
Select Event Menu Cell Ref
01 N/A 01
01 02
Unsigned Integer(16 bits) Cell Reference
30100 30101 30102 40100 30107
G1 G1 G1 0 G13 (From Record) Setting Data 0 249 1 0 * * * * * *
No of event records stored No of fault records stored No of maintenance records stored Max value is the oldest record Indicates type of event See Event sheet
Fault Time Record Text Record Value
01 01 01
03 04 05
IEC870 Time & Date Ascii String (32 chars) Unsigned Integer (32 bits)
30103
30106
G12
(From Record)
Data Data
* * *
* * *
* * * See Event sheet Note DTL depends on event type See Event sheet of Spreadsheet Allows Fault Record to be selected Additional data present
30108
30109
G27
Data
Select Fault
01
06
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
40101 30110
G1 G1
Setting
* *
* * *
* * *
Started Phase ABCN Tripped Phase ABCN Gen Differential Trip Power Start 1 2 Power Trip 1 2 Field Failure Alarm Field Failure Start 1 2 Field Failure Trip 1 2 NPS Thermal Alarm Trip
N/A
Data
A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N N/A Data * * * A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N N/A Data *
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if Start 1/2
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if Start 1/2
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
N/A
Data
Menu Text System Backup Start Trip Overcurrent Start I> 1234 Overcurrent Trip I> 1234 Earth Fault Start IN> 1234 Earth Fault Trip IN> 1234 Sensitive E/F Start ISEF> 1234 Sensitive E/F Trip ISEF> 1234 Restricted E/F Trip IREF> Residual O/V NVD Start VN> 1 2 Residual O/V NVD Trip VN> 1 2 100% Stator EF Start Trip V/Hz Alarm Start Trip df/dt Start Trip V Vector Shift Trip Dead Machine Trip U/Voltage start V< 1 2 AB BC CA
UI
Courier Col Row N/A
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * *
Comment
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Start IN>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip IN>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Start ISEF>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip ISEF>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if Start VN>1/2
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if Trip VN>1/2
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
Ph-Ph or Ph-N 1/2 visible if Start V<1/2
Menu Text U/Voltage Trip V< 1 2 AB BC CA O/Voltage Start V> 1 2 AB BC CA O/Voltage Trip V> 1 2 AB BC CA Underfrequency Start F< 1234 Underfrequency Trip F< 1234 Overfrequency Start F> 1 2 Overfrequency Trip F> 1 2 RTD Alarm RTD 1 Label RTD Alarm RTD 2 Label RTD Alarm RTD 3 Label RTD Alarm RTD 4 Label RTD Alarm RTD 5 Label RTD Alarm RTD 6 Label RTD Alarm RTD 7 Label RTD Alarm RTD 8 Label RTD Alarm RTD 9 Label RTD Alarm RTD 10 Label
UI
Courier Col Row N/A
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment Ph-Ph or Ph-N 1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2 Ph-Ph or Ph-N 1/2 visible if Start V>1/2 Ph-Ph or Ph-N 1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Start F<1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip F<1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if Start F>1/2
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if Trip F>1/2
N/A
Data
Visible if Alarm RTD 1
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
Menu Text RTD Trip RTD 1 Label RTD Trip RTD 2 Label RTD Trip RTD 3 Label RTD Trip RTD 4 Label RTD Trip RTD 5 Label RTD Trip RTD 6 Label RTD Trip RTD 7 Label RTD Trip RTD 8 Label RTD Trip RTD 9 Label RTD Trip RTD 10 Label Breaker Fail CB Fail 1 2 Supervision VTS CTS Faulted Phase Start Elements1
UI
Courier Col Row N/A
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * *
Comment Visible if Trip RTD 1
N/A
Data
Visible if Trip RTD 2
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
* 1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2
N/A
Data
* VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
N/A 01 N/A 01
07 08
Binary Flag (8 Bits) Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String
G16 G84
30111 30112 30113
G16 G84
Data Data
* *
* *
* *
Started phases + tripped phases Started Elements
Start Elements2
N/A 01
09
G107
30114
30115
G107
Data
Started Elements
Trip Elements1
N/A 01
0A
G85
30116
30117
G85
Data
Tripped main elements
Trip Elements2
N/A 01
0B
G86
30118
30119
G86
Data
Tripped secondary elements
Menu Text Fault Alarms
UI
Courier Col Row 0C
Data type Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String IEC870 Time & Date Unsigned Integer Courier Number (frequency) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (current)
Strings G87
Modbus Start 30120
Address End 30121
Default Setting
Cell Type Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment Faullt Alarms/Warnings
N/A 01
Time & Date Active Group System Frequency Fault Duration CB Operate Time Relay Trip Time
01 01 01 01 01 01 01
0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13
30122 30126 30127 30128 30130 30131 30133
30125
G12 G1 G30
(From Record)
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
* * * * * * *
* * * * * * *
* * * * * *
30129
G24 G25
30132 30134
G24 G24
IA IA-1 IB IB-1 IC IC-1

VAB VBC VCA VAN VBN VCN
* 01 14 Courier Number (current) 30135 30136 G24 Data * * * 01 15 Courier Number (current) 30137 30138 G24 Data * * * 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) 30139 30141 30143 30145 30147 30149 30151 30153 30155 30157 30159 30161 30163 30165 30140 30142 30144 30146 30148 30150 30152 30154 30156 30158 30160 30162 30164 30166 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
IA-2 IB-2 IC-2 IA Differential IB Differential IC Differential

VN Measured VN Derived
* * * *
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 01 24
Data type Courier Number (current)
Strings
Modbus Start 30167
Address End 30168
Default Setting
Cell Type Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
IN Derived IN Measured IN Sensitive IREF Diff IREF Bias I2

3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3Ph Power Factor RTD 1 Label RTD 2 Label RTD 3 Label RTD 4 Label RTD 5 Label RTD 6 Label RTD 7 Label RTD 8 Label RTD 9 Label RTD 10 Label df/dt V Vector Shift Select Maint Maint Text Maint Type Maint Data Reset Indication
01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01
25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 F0 F1 F2 F3 FF
Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Hz/s) Courier Number (Angle) Unsigned Integer (16 bits) Ascii Text (32 chars) Unsigned integer (32 bits) Unsigned integer (32 bits) Indexed String G11
30169 30171 30173 30175 30177 30180 30183 30184 30185 30186 30187 30188 30189 30190 30191 30192 30193 30194 30195 40102
30170 30172 30174 30176 30179 30182
G24 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29 G30 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G25 G30 G1
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting Data 0 4 1 0
* * * *
* * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * 0 1 1 1 * * * * * * * * * * *
Visible if df/ft trip Visible if V Vector shift trip Allows Self Test Report to be selected
30196 30198
30197 30199
G27 G27 No
Data Data Command
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 00 02 01
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level *
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * *
Comment
MEASUREMENTS 1 02
IA Magnitude IA-1 Magnitude IA Phase Angle IA-1 Phase Angle IB Magnitude IB-1 Magnitude IB Phase Angle IB-1 Phase Angle IC Magnitude IC-1 Magnitude IC Phase Angle IC-1 Phase Angle IN Measured Mag IN Measured Ang IN Derived Mag IN Derived Angle ISEF Magnitude ISEF Angle I1 Magnitude I2 Magnitude I0 Magnitude IA RMS IB RMS IC RMS
VAB Magnitude VAB Phase Angle VBC Magnitude VBC Phase Angle
Courier Number (current)
30200
30201
G24
Data
02
02
Courier Number (angle)
30202
G30
Data
* *
02
03
30203
30204
G24
Data
* *
02
04
30205
G30
Data
* *
02
05
30206
30207
G24
Data
* *
02
06
30208
G30
Data
* *
02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02
07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 14 15 16 17
Courier Number (current) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (degrees) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle)
30209 30211 30212 30214 30215 30217 30218 30220 30222 30224 30226 30228 30230 30232 30233 30235
30210
G24 G30
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* *
* *
30213
G24 G30
30216
G24 G30
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
30219 30221 30223 30225 30227 30229 30231
G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G30
30234
G24 G30
Menu Text VCA Magnitude VCA Phase Angle VAN Magnitude VAN Phase Angle VBN Magnitude VBN Phase Angle VCN Magnitude VCN Phase Angle VN Measured Mag VN Measured Ang VN Derived Mag VN Derived Ang V1 Magnitude V2 Magnitude V0 Magnitude VAN RMS VBN RMS VCN RMS Frequency MEASUREMENTS 2 A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs
UI
Courier Col Row 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2D 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Data type Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (angle) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (frequency)
Strings
Modbus Start 30236 30238 30239 30241 30242 30244 30245 30247 30248 30250 30251 30252 30253 30255 30257 30259 30261 30263 30265
Address End 30237
Modbus Datagroup G24 G30
Default Setting
Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
30240
G24 G30
30243
G24 G30
30246
G24 G30
30249
G24 G30
30252
G24 G30
30254 30256 30258 30260 30262 30264
G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G30
Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (VAr)
30300 30303 30306 30309 30312 30315
30302 30305 30308 30311 30314 30317
G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29
Data Data Data Data Data Data
* * * * * *
Menu Text A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA 3Ph Power Factor APh Power Factor BPh Power Factor CPh Power Factor 3Ph WHours Fwd 3Ph WHours Rev 3Ph VArHours Fwd 3Ph VArHours Rev 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem
UI
Courier Col Row 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21
Data type Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (VA) Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (decimal) Courier Number (Wh) Courier Number (Wh) Courier Number (VArh) Courier Number (VArh) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (Vars) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Power) Courier Number (VAr)
Strings
Modbus Start 30318 30321 30324 30327 30330 30333 30339 30340 30341 30342 30343 30346 30349 30352 30355 30358 30361 30363 30365 30367 30370 30373 30375 30377 30379 30382
Address End 30320 30323 30326 30329 30332 30335
Modbus Datagroup G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G30 G30 G30 G30
Default Setting
Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
30345 30348 30351 30354 30357 30360 30362 30364 30366 30369 30372 30374 30376 30378 30381 30384
G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29
3 Phase Watt - Hours (Forward) 3 Phase Watts - Hours (Reverse) 3 Phase VAr - Hours (Forward) 3 Phase VAr - Hours (Reverse) 3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand 3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand
IA IB IC
Fixed Demand Fixed Demand Fixed Demand
3 Ph W Roll Dem 3Ph VArs RollDem
3 Phase Watts - Rolling Demand 3 Phase VArs - Rolling Demand
IA Roll Demand IB Roll Demand IC Roll Demand

3Ph W Peak Dem 3Ph VAr Peak Dem
3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand 3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 03 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 22 23 24 25 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15
Data type Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Start 30385 30387 30389
Address End 30386 30388 30390
Modbus Datagroup G24 G24 G24 G11
Default Setting
Cell Type Data Data Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
IA Peak Demand IB Peak Demand IC Peak Demand

Reset Demand MEASUREMENTS 3
G11
40103
No
Command
IA-2 Magnitude IA-2 Phase Angle IB-2 Magnitude IB-2 Phase Angle IC-2 Magnitude IC-2 Phase Angle IA Differential IB Differential IC Differential IA Bias IB Bias IC Bias IREF Diff IREF Bias
VN 3rd Harmonic Rotor Thermal Reset Thermal RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4
Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Percentage) Indexed String Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) G11
30400 30402 30403 30405 30406 30408 30409 30411 30413 30415 30417 30419 30421 30423 30425 30427 40104 30428 30429 30430 30431
30401
G24 G30
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data No Command Data Data Data Data 0 1 1 1
30404
G24 G30
30407
G24 G30
30410 30412 30414 30416 30418 30420 30422 30424 30426
G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G1 G11 G10 G10 G10 G10
(090B=1) && (X001 = 1) (090B=1) && (X001 = 1) (090B=1) && (X001 = 1)
(0915=1) && (XA01 >= 3) (0915=1) && (XA01 >= 3)
(090E=1) && (X304 = 1) (090E=1) && (X304 = 1)
* * * * *
Menu Text RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10 RTD Open Cct RTD Short Cct RTD data error Reset RTD flags CB CONDITION CB Operations Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken CB Operate Time Reset CB Data CB CONTROL CB Control by Close Pulse Time Trip Pulse Time Man Close Delay CB Healthy Time Lockout Reset Reset Lockout by Man Close RstDly
UI
Courier Col Row 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 00 01 02 03 05 06 08 09 0A
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start 30432 30433 30434 30435 30436 30437
Address End
Default Setting
Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Binary Flag (10 bits) Binary Flag (10 bits) Binary Flag (10 bits) Indexed string G108 G109 G110 G11
30438 30439 30440 40105
No
Command
1 *
* * * * * * * * *
CB CONDITION MONITORING Number of Circuit Breaker Operations Broken Current A Phase Broken Current B Phase Broken Current C Phase Circuit Breaker operating time Reset All Values
Unsigned Integer Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (time) Indexed String G11
30600 30601 30603 30605 30607 40150 30602 30604 30606
G1 G24 G24 G24 G25 G11 No
Data Data Data Data Data Command 0 1 1 1
* * * * * * *
Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Time)
G99
40200 40201 40202 40203 40204 40205
G99 G2 G2 G2 G35 G11 G81 G2
Disabled 0.5 0.5 10 5 No CB Close 5
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Setting Setting
0 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0 0 0.01
7 10 5 600 9999 1 1 600
1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 0.01
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * Manual Close Reset Delay Manual Close Delay
G11 G81
40206 40207 40208
Menu Text CB Status Input DATE AND TIME Date/Time Date 12-Jan-98 Time 12:00 IRIG-B Sync IRIG-B Status Battery Status Battery Alarm CONFIGURATION Restore Defaults Setting Group Active Settings Save Changes Copy From Copy To Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Gen Differential Power Field Failure NPS Thermal System Backup
UI
Courier Col Row 07 08 11 00 01 N/A
Data type Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Start 40209
Address End
Default Setting None
Cell Type Setting
Min 0
Max 3
Step 1
Password Level 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
N/A 08
IEC870 Time & Date
40300
40303
G12
Setting
* *
Front Panel Menu only
N/A
Front Panel Menu only
08 08 08 08 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09
04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
G37 G17 G59 G37
40304 30090 30091 40305
G37 G17 G59 G37
Disabled
Setting Data Data
* * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Enabled
Setting
* *
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
40402 40403 40404 40405 40406 40407 40408 40409 40410 40411 40412 40413 40414 40415 40416
G53 G61 G90 G62 G90 G98 G37 G37 G37 G37
No Operation Menu 1 No Operation Group 1 No Operation Enabled Disabled Disbaled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Command Setting Setting Command Setting Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 1 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * *
* * * *
Menu Text Overcurrent Earth Fault SEF/REF Protn
UI
Courier Col Row 09 09 09 10 13 15
Data type Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
Strings G37 G37 G37
Modbus Start 40417 40418 40419
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Visible Visible Visible Visible Invisible Invisible Invisible Visible Visible Primary
Cell Type Setting Setting Setting
Min 0 0 0
Max 1 1 1
Step 1 1 1
Password Level 2 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Residual O/V NVD 100% Stator EF V/Hz df/dt V Vector Shift Dead Machine Reconnect Delay Volt Protection Freq Protection RTD Inputs CB Fail Supervision Input Labels Output Labels RTD Labels CT & VT Ratios Recorder Control Disturb Recorder Measuret Setup Comms Settings Commission Tests Setting Values
09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09
16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G54
40420 40421 40422 40423 40424 40425 40426 40427 40428 40429 40430 40431
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Residual Overvoltage
Disturbance recorder
40400 40401
G18 G6
Record selection command register Record control command register
Menu Text CT AND VT RATIOS
UI
Courier Col Row 0A 00
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment values for multiplier see mult column Label V1=Main VT Rating/110
Main VT Primary Main VT Secy
0A 0A
01 02
Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage)
40500 40502
40501
G35 G2
110 110
Setting Setting
100 80*V1
1000000 1 140*V1 1*V1
2 2
* *
* *
* *
Label M1=0A01/0A02 NVD VT Primary 0A 05 Courier Number (Voltage) 40506 40507 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * * 110 NVD VT Secondary 0A 06 Courier Number (Voltage) 40508 G2 110 Setting 80*V3 140*V3 1*V3 2 * * * Neutral Displacement VT Secondary Label M3=0A05/0A06 Neutral Displacement VT Primary Label V3=Neutral Disp VT Rating/
Phase CT Primary Phase CT Secy
0A 0A
07 08
Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current)
40509 40510
G2 G2
1 1
Setting Setting
1 1
30000 5
1 4
2 2
* *
* *
* *
I1=Phase CT secondary rating

Label M4=0A07/0A08
E/F CT Primary E/F CT Secondary
0A 0A
09 0A
Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current)
40511 40512
G2 G2
1 1
Setting Setting
1 1
30000 5
1 4
2 2
* *
* *
Label I2=E/F CT secondary rating
Label M5=0A09/0A0A SEF CT Primary SEF CT Secondary 0A 0A 0B 0C Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) 40513 40514 G2 G2 1 1 Setting Setting 1 1 30000 5 1 4 2 2 * * * * * * Label M6=0A0B/0A0C RECORD CONTROL Clear Events Clear Faults Clear Maint DISTURB RECORDER Duration Trigger Position Trigger Mode 0B 0B 0B 0B 0C 0C 0C 0C 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 03 Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (%) Indexed String G34 40600 40601 40602 G2 G2 G34 1.5 33.3 Single Setting Setting 0.1 0 0 10.5 100 1 0.01 0.1 1 2 2 2 Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String G11 G11 G11 No No No Command Command Command 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DISTURBANCE RECORDER Label I3=SEF CT secondary rating
Analog Channel 1
0C
04
Indexed String
G31
40603
G31
VAN
Setting
**
** Max = 7 for Model 1, 8 for Model 2, 11 for Model 3
Menu Text Analog Channel 2
UI
Courier Col Row 0C 05
Strings G31
Modbus Start 40604
Address End
Default Setting VBN
Cell Type Setting
Min 0
Max **
Step 1
Password Level 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment ** Max = 7 for Model 1, 8 for Model 2, 11 for Model 3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3
Analog Channel 3
0C
06
Indexed String
G31
40605
G31
VCN
Setting
**
Analog Channel 4
0C
07
Indexed String
G31
40606
G31
VN
Setting
**
Analog Channel 5
0C
08
Indexed String
G31
40607
G31
IA
Setting
**
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2, 11 for Model3 ** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2. 11 for Model3 Note: Number of signals is model dependent
Analog Channel 6
0C
09
Indexed String
G31
40608
G31
IB
Setting
**
Analog Channel 7
0C
0A
Indexed String
G31
40609
G31
IC
Setting
**
Analog Channel 8
0C
0B
Indexed String
G31
40610
G31
IN SEF
Setting
**
Digital Input 1
0C
0C
Indexed String
G32
40611
G32
Relay 1
Setting
See Note
Input 1 Trigger Digital Input 2 Input 2 Trigger Digital Input 3 Input 3 Trigger Digital Input 4 Input 4 Trigger Digital Input 5 Input 5 Trigger
0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C
0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66
40612 40613 40614 40615 40616 40617 40618 40619 40620
G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66
No Trigger Relay 2 No Trigger Relay 3 No Trigger Relay 4 No Trigger Relay 5 No Trigger
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * *
Menu Text Digital Input 6 Input 6 Trigger Digital Input 7 Input 7 Trigger Digital Input 8
UI
Courier Col Row 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 16 17 18 19 1A
Data type Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String
Strings G32 G66 G32 G66 G32
Modbus Start 40621 40622 40623 40624 40625
Address End
Modbus Datagroup G32 G66 G32 G66 G32
Default Setting Relay 6 No Trigger Relay 7 No Trigger Opto Input 1 Relay 8 No Trigger Opto Input 2 Relay 9 No Trigger Opto Input 3 Relay 10 No Trigger Opto Input 4 Relay 11 No Trigger Opto Input 5 Relay 12 No Trigger Opto Input 6 Relay 13 No Trigger Opto Input 7 Relay 14 No Trigger Opto Input 8 Opto Input 1 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 2
Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
Min 0 0 0 0 0
Max See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note
Step 1 1 1 1 1
Password Level 2 2 2 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Input 8 Trigger Digital Input 9
0C 0C
1B 1C
Indexed String Indexed String
G66 G32
40626 40627
G66 G32
Setting Setting
0 0
2 See Note
1 1
2 2
* *
* *
* Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * *
0C 0C
1D 1E
G66 G32
40628 40629
G66 G32
0C 0C
1F 20
G66 G32
40630 40631
G66 G32
0C 0C
21 22
G66 G32
40632 40633
G66 G32
0C 0C
23 24
G66 G32
40634 40635
G66 G32
0C 0C
25 26
G66 G32
40636 40637
G66 G32
0C 0C
27 28
G66 G32
40638 40639
G66 G32
0C 0C
29 2A
G66 G32
40640 40641
G66 G32
Menu Text Input 16 Trigger Digital Input 17
UI
Courier Col Row 0C 0C 2B 2C
Data type Indexed String Indexed String
Strings G66 G32
Modbus Start 40642 40643
Address End
Default Setting No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 3 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 4 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 5 No Trigger
Cell Type Setting Setting
Min 0 0
Max 2 See Note
Step 1 1
Password Level 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * *
Comment
0C 0C
2D 2E
G66 G32
40644 40645
G66 G32
Setting Setting
0 0
2 See Note
1 1
2 2
* *
* *
* Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * *
0C 0C
2F 30
G66 G32
40646 40647
G66 G32
Input 19 Trigger
0C
31
Indexed String
G66
40648
G66
Digital Input 20
0C
32
Indexed String
G32
40649
G32
Not Used Opto Input 6
Setting
See Note
* *
0C 0C
33 34
G66 G32
40650 40651
G66 G32
No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 7 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 8 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 9 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 10 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 11 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 12
Setting Setting
0 0
2 See Note
1 1
2 2
* *
* *
* Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * * * * * *
0C 0C
35 36
G66 G32
40652 40653
G66 G32
0C 0C
37 38
G66 G32
40654 40655
G66 G32
0C 0C
39 3A
G66 G32
40656 40657
G66 G32
0C 0C
3B 3C
G66 G32
40658 40659
G66 G32
0C 0C
3D 3E
G66 G32
40660 40661
G66 G32
Menu Text Input 26 Trigger Digital Input 27
UI
Courier Col Row 0C 0C 3F 40
Data type Indexed String Indexed String
Strings G66 G32
Address End
Default Setting No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 13 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 14 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 15 No Trigger Not Used Opto Input 16 No Trigger Not Used
Min 0 0
Max 2 See Note
Step 1 1
Password Level 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * *
Comment
0C 0C
41 42
G66 G32
40664 40665
G66 G32
Setting Setting
0 0
2 See Note
1 1
2 2
* *
* *
* Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * Setting Setting 0 0 2 See Note 1 1 2 2 * * * * * * * *
0C 0C
43 44
G66 G32
40666 40667
G66 G32
0C 0C
45 46
G66 G32
40668 40669
G66 G32
0C 0C
47 48
G66 G32
40670 40671
G66 G32
0C 0C
49 4A
G66 G32
40672 40673
G66 G32
No Trigger Not Used
Setting Setting
0 0
2 See Note
1 1
2 2
* *
* *
* *
Input 32 Trigger MEASURET SETUP Default Display Local Values Remote Values Measurement Ref Measurement Mode Fix Dem Period Roll Sub Period Num Sub Periods
0C 0D
4B 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Indexed String
G66
40674
G66
No Trigger
Setting
* *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * Fixed Demand Interval Rolling demand sub period Number of rolling sub-periods Local Measurement Values Remote Measurement Values Measurement Phase Reference MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Unsigned Integer Courier Number (time-minutes) Courier Number (time-minutes) Unsigned Integer
G52 G54 G54 G56
40700 40701 40702 40703 40705 40706 40707 40708
G52 G54 G54 G56 G1 G2 G2 G1
Description Primary Primary VA 0 15 1 15
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
7 1 1 5 3 99 99 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
* * * * * * * *
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 00 01 02 02 03 04 04 05 06 07
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
COMMUNICATIONS Rear Protocol Remote Address Remote Address Inactivity Timer Baud Rate Baud Rate Parity Measuret Period Physical Link
Indexed String
G71
Courier 255
Data Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 255 247 30 1 2 2 60 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
* * * * * * * * *
Build = Courier or IEC60870-5-103 Build = Modbus
Unsigned integer (16 bits) Courier Number (Time-minutes) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String G21 G38 G38 G39
247 15 9600 bits/s 9600 bits/s None 10 RS485
Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build = Modbus Build = Modbus Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build=IEC60870-5-103 and Fibre Optic board fitted Build = IEC60870-5-103 *
Function Type COMMISSION TESTS Opto I/P Status
0E
08 0F
Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 00 Binary Flag(16 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(8 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(8 bits) Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer 0-7 30700 G8
224
Setting
253
* *
* * *
0F
01
Data
Relay O/P Status
0F
02
30701
30702
G9
Data
Test Port Status
0F
03
30703
0-7
Data
LED Status Monitor Bit 1 Monitor Bit 2 Monitor Bit 3 Monitor Bit 4 Monitor Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Monitor Bit 7 Monitor Bit 8
0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F
04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C
30704 40850 40851 40852 40853 40854 40855 40856 40857
0-7 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Data Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
* * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * Default LED 1 Default LED 2 Default LED 3 Default LED 4 Default LED 5 Default LED 6 Default LED 7 Default LED 8
Menu Text Test Mode Test Pattern
UI
Courier Col Row 0F 0F 0D 0E
Data type Indexed String Binary Flag (21bits) Indexed String Indexed String Binary Flag (8bits) Indexed String 00 Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Current)
Strings G37 G9
Address End
Default Setting Disabled 0
Min 0 0
Max 1 20
Step 1 1
Password Level 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * *
Comment
40860
G9
Contact Test Test LEDs
0F 0F
0F 10
G93 G94
40861 40862
G93 G94
No Operation No Operation
Command Command
0 0
2 1
1 1
2 2
* *
* *
* *
CB MONITOR SETUP Broken I^ 10 10 10
10 01 02 03
* 40151 G88 40152 40153 40154 G2 G88 G35 2 Alarm Disabled 1000 Setting Setting Setting 1 0 1 * NM1 2 1 25000 * NM1 0.1 1 1 * NM1 2 2 2 * * * * * *
* * * *
* Broken Current Index Broken Current maintenance alarm Broken Current maintenance threshold
I^ Maintenance I^ Maintenance
I^ Lockout I^ Lockout
No. CB Ops Maint
10 10
04 05
Indexed String Courier Number (Current)
G88
40155 40156 40157
G88 G35
Alarm Disabled 2000
Setting Setting
0 1 * NM1
1 25000 * NM1 1
1 1 * NM1
2 2
* *
* *
* *
Broken Current lockout alarm Broken Current lockout threshold
10
06
Indexed String
G88
40158
G88
Alarm Disabled
Setting
Circuit Breaker Trips maintenance alarm CB Trips maintenance threshold Circuit Breaker Trips lockout alarm CB Trips lockout threshold CB Operating Time maintenance alarm CB Operating Time maintenance
No. CB Ops Maint No. CB Ops Lock No. CB Ops Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Maint threshold CB Time Lockout CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock Fault Freq Count Fault Freq Time
10 10 10 10 10
07 08 09 0A 0B
Unsigned Integer Indexed String Unsigned Integer Indexed String Courier Number (Time) G88 G88
40159 40160 40161 40162 40163 40164
G1 G88 G1 G88 G35
10 Alarm Disabled 20 Alarm Disabled 0.1
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
1 0 1 0 0.005
10000 1 10000 1 0.5
1 1 1 1 0.001
2 2 2 2 2
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
10 10 10 10 10
0C 0D 0E 0F 10
Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Unsigned Integer Courier Number (Time)
G88
40165 40166 40167
G88 G35 G88 G1 40171 G35
Alarm Disabled 0.2 Alarm Disabled 10 3600
0 0.005 0 0 0
1 0.5 1 9999 9999
1 0.001 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
CB Operating Time lockout alarm
CB Operating Time lockout threshold Excessive fault frequency alarm Excessive Fault Frequency Counter Excessive Fault Frequency Time
G88
40168 40169 40170
Menu Text GROUP 1 GEN DIFF GenDiff Function Gen Diff Is1 Gen Diff k1 Gen Diff Is2 Gen Diff k2 GROUP 1 POWER Power1 Function
UI
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 *
Comment
30 30 30 30 30 31
01 02 03 04 05 00
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Percentage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Percentage)
G101
41000 41001 41002 41003 41004
G101 G2 G2 G2 G2
Percentage Bias 0.1 0 1.2 150
0 0.05*I1 0 1*I1 20
2 0.5*I1 20 5*I1 150
1 0.01*I1 5 0.1*I1 10
2 2 2 2 2 * *
* * * * * *
31
01
Indexed String
G102
41050
G102
Over Reverse 20 5 20 10 120 120 5 0 Enabled Disabled Low Forward 20 5 20 10 120 120 2 0
Setting
* * *
-P>1 Setting
31
02
Courier Number (Power)
41051
G2
Setting
14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 0 0 0 0 100 100 1 3 0.01 0.01 1 1 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P<1 Setting
31
03
41052
G2
Setting
P>1 Setting
31
04
41053
G2
Setting
Power1 TimeDelay Power1 DO Timer P1 Poledead Inh Power2 Function
31 31 31 31
05 06 07 08
Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String G37 G102
41054 41055 41056 41057
G2 G2 G37 G102
Setting Setting Setting Setting
P>2 Setting
31
09
41058
G2
Setting
14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 0 0 100 100 0.01 0.01 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
P<2 Setting
31
0A
41059
G2
Setting
P>2 Setting
31
0B
41060
G2
Setting
Power2 TimeDelay Power2 DO Timer
31 31
0C 0D
Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
41061 41062
G2 G2
Setting Setting
Menu Text P2 Poledead Inh GROUP 1 FIELD FAILURE FFail Alm Status FFail Alm Angle FFail Alm Delay FFail1 Status FFail1 -Xa1 FFail1 Xb1 FFail1 TimeDelay FFail1 DO Timer FFail2 Status FFail2 -Xa2 FFail2 Xb2 FFail2 TimeDelay FFail2 DO Timer GROUP 1 NPS THERMAL
UI
Courier Col Row 31 32 0E 00
Strings G37
Modbus Start 41063
Address End
Default Setting Enabled
Cell Type Setting
Min 0
Max 1
Step 1
Password Level 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * *
Comment
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 33
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 00
Indexed String Courier Number (Angle) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
G37
41100 41101 41102
G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2
Disabled 15 5 Enabled 20 220 5 0 Disabled 20 110 0 0
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 15 0 0 0
1 75 100 1
1 1 0.01 1
2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
G37
41103 41104 41105 41106 41107
40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 2 2 2 2
25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 0 0 0 0 100 100 1 0.01 0.01 1
G37
41108 41109 41110 41111 41112
40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 2 2 2
25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 0 0 100 100 0.01 0.01
I2>1 Alarm I2>1 Current Set I2>1 Time Delay I2>2 Trip I2>2 Current Set I2>2 k Setting I2>2 kRESET I2>2 tMAX
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
G37
41150 41151 41152
G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2
Enabled 0.05 20s Enabled 0.1 15 15 1000
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0.03*I1 0 0 0.05*I1 2 2 500
1 0.5*I1 100 1 0.5*I1 40 40 2000
1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 0.01*I1 0.1 0.1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
G37
41153 41154 41155 41156 41157
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 33 34 09 00
Data type Courier Number (Time)
Strings
Modbus Start 41158
Address End
Modbus Datagroup G2
Default Setting 0.25
Cell Type Setting
Min 0
Max 100
Step 0.01
Password Level 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * *
Comment
I2>2 tMIN
GROUP 1 SYSTEM BACKUP Backup Function Vector Rotation V Dep OC Char V Dep OC I> Set V Dep OC T Dial V Dep OC Reset V Dep OC Delay V Dep OC TMS V Dep OC tRESET V Dep OC V<1 Set V Dep OC V<2 Set V Dep OC k Set Z< Setting Z< Time Delay Z< tRESET GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 35
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 00
Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Impedance) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
G103 G104 G111
41200 41201 41202 41203 41204 41205 41206 41207 41208 41209 41210 41211 41212 41213 41214
Voltage controlled Setting None IEC S Inverse 1 7 DT 1 1 0 80 60 0.25 70 5 0 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0.8*I1 0.5 0 0 0.025 0 20*V1 20*V1 0.25 2*V1/I1 0 0
3 1 9 4*I1 15 1 100 1.2 100 120*V1 120*V1 1
1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.1 1 0.01 0.025 0.01 1*V1 1*V1 0.05
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * OC reset characteritic selection. Apply to DT trip characteristic only
120*V1/I10.5*V1/I1 2 100 100 0.01 0.01 2 2
I>1 Function I>1 Direction I>1 Current Set I>1 Time Delay I>1 TMS
35
01
Indexed String
G43
41250
G43
IEC S Inverse Disabled Non-Directional 1 1 1
Setting
10
* * *
35 35 35 35
02 03 04 05
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal)
G44
41251 41252 41253 41254
G44 G2 G2 G2
0 0.08*I1 0 0.025
2 4.0*I1 100 1.2
1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.025
2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * *
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 35 35 35 35 06 07 08 09
Data type Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Start 41255
Address End
Modbus Datagroup G2 G60 G2 G43 G105 G44 G2
Default Setting 7 DT 0 Disabled DT Non-Directional 1 10 1 0 1 7 DT 0 Disabled Non-Directional 20 0 Disabled Non-Directional 20 0 30 15
Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting
Min 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0.08*I1 0
Max 15 1 100 10 1 2 4.0*I1 10.0*I1 100
Step 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01*I1 0.01
Password Level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
I>1 Time Dial I>1 Reset Char I>1 tRESET I>2 Function I>2 Direction I>2 Current Set I>2 Time Delay I>2 TMS I>2 Time Dial I>2 Reset Char I>2 tRESET I>3 Status I>3 Direction I>3 Current Set I>3 Time Delay I>4 Status I>4 Direction I>4 Current Set I>4 Time Delay I> Char Angle I> Function Link
GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT
G60
41256 41257
G43 G105 G44
41258
35 35
0A 0B
41259 41260
Setting Setting
35
0C
Courier Number (Time)
41261
G2
Setting
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 38
0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 00
Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Angle) Binary Flag G14 G37 G44 G37 G44 G60
41262 41263 41264 41265 41266 41267 41268 41269 41270 41271 41272 41273 41274 41275
G2 G2 G60 G2 G37 G44 G2 G2 G37 G44 G2 G2 G2 G14
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 -95 15
1.2 15 1 100 1 2 32*I1 100 1 2 32*I1 100 95 4
0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
I> Characteristic Angle
IN Input IN>1 Function
38
01
Indexed String
G49
Derived Measured 41400 G43 IEC S Inverse
Data Data Setting 0 10 1 2
* * * * * *
38
02
Indexed String
G43
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 38 38 03 04
Data type Indexed String Courier Number (Current)
Strings G44
Address End
Default Setting Non-Directional 0.2 0.1 1 1 7 DT 0 Disabled Disabled Non-Directional 0.2 0.45 1 0 1 7 DT 0 Disabled Non-Directional 0.5 0 Disabled Non-Directional 0.5 0 15
Min 0 0.08*I1 0.02*I2 0 0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0.02*I2 0
Max 2 4.0*I1 4.0*I2 200 1.2 15 1 100 10 1 2 4.0*I1 10.0*I2 200
Step 1 0.01*I1 0.01*I2 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01*I2 0.01
Password Level 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * *
Comment
IN>1 Direction IN>1 Current IN>1 Time Delay IN>1 TMS IN>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Function IN>2 Direction IN>2 Current IN>2 Time Delay IN>2 TMS IN>2 Time Dial IN>2 Reset Char IN>2 tRESET IN>3 Status IN>3 Direction IN>3 Current IN>3 Time Delay IN>4 Status IN>4 Direction IN>4 Current IN>4 Time Delay IN> Func Link
38 38 38 38 38 38
05 06 07 08 09 0A
Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String G43 G105 G44 G60
41403 41404 41405 41406 41407 41408
G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G43 G105 G44 G2
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
* * * * *
* * * *
38 38
0B 0C
41409 41410
Setting Setting
38
0D
41411
G2
Setting
* * *
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A
Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Binary Flags G63 G37 G44 G37 G44 G60
41412 41413 41414 41415 41416 41417 41418 41419 41420 41421 41422 41423 41424
G2 G2 G60 G2 G37 G44 G2 G2 G37 G44 G2 G2 G63
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 15
1.2 15 1 100 1 2 32*I1 200 1 2 32*I1 200 4
0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 3A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 00
Data type (Sub Heading) Courier Number(Angle) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Current)
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
IN> DIRECTIONAL IN> Char Angle IN> Pol IN> VNpol Input IN> VNpol Set IN> V2pol Set IN> I2pol Set
GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROTN SEF/REF Options
41425 G46 G49 41426 41427 41428 41429 41430
G2 G46 G49 G2 G2 G2
-60 Zero Sequence Measured 5 5 0.08
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
-95 0 0 0.5*V1 0.5*V1 0.08*I1
95 1 1 22*V1 25*V1 1*I1
1 1 1 0.5*V1 0.5*V1 0.01*I1
2 2 2 2 2 2
V1 applied for VN set to dervied.
3A
01
Indexed String
G58
41500
G58
SEF
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0.005*I3 0 0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0
2 5 10 1 2 0.1*I3 200 1.2 15 1 100 10 2
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2
* * * * * * * * *
ISEF>1 Function ISEF>1 Direction

ISEF>1 Current
3A
02
Indexed String
G43 G105 G44
41501
G43 G105 G44 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G43 G44 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60
DT
Setting
3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String
41502 41503 41504 41505 41506
Non-Directional 0.05 1 1 7 DT 0 Disabled Non-Directional 0.05 1 1 7 DT
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
* * * * * * * * * 2 * * * *
* * *
0.00025*I3 2 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
ISEF>1 Delay ISEF>1 TMS ISEF>1 Time Dial ISEF>1 Reset Chr ISEF>1 tRESET ISEF>2 Function ISEF>2 Direction ISEF>2 Current ISEF>2 Delay ISEF>2 TMS ISEF>2 Time Dial ISEF>2 Reset Chr
G60
41507 41508
G43 G44
41509 41510 41511 41512 41513 41514
0.005*I3 0.1*I3 0 0.025 0.5 0 200 1.2 15 1
0.00025*I3 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 2 2 2 2
G60
41515
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A
Data type Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) Binary Flags
Strings
Modbus Start 41516
Address End
Default Setting 0 Disabled Non-Directional 0.4 0.5 Disabled Non-Directional 0.6 0.25 15
Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
Min 0 0 0
Max 100 1 2
Step 0.01 1 1
Password Level 2 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
ISEF>2 tRESET ISEF>3 Status ISEF>3 Direction ISEF>3 Current ISEF>3 Delay ISEF>4 Status ISEF>4 Direction ISEF>4 Current ISEF>4 Delay ISEF> Func Link ISEF DIRECTIONAL ISEF> Char Angle ISEF>VNpol Input ISEF> VNpol Set
WATTMETRIC SEF PN> Setting
G37 G44
41517 41518 41519 41520
0.005*I3 0.8*I3 0 0 0 200 1 2
0.001*I3 2 0.01 1 1 2 2 2
G37 G44
41521 41522 41523 41524
0.005*I3 0.8*I3 0 15 1 200 4 1
0.001*I3 2 0.01 1 1 2 2 2 2
G64
41525
3A 3A 3A 3A
1B 1C 1D 1E
(Sub Heading) Courier Number(Angle) Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) G49 41526 41527 41528 G2 G49 G2 90 Measured 5 Setting Setting Setting -95 0 0.5*V1 0.5*V3 95 1 22*V1 22*V3 1 1 0.5*V1 0.5*V3
2 2 2
V1 applied when VN set to dervied. V3 applied when VN set to measured
3A 3A
1F 20
(Sub Heading) Courier Number (Power) 41529 G2 9 Setting 0.0*V1*I3 20*V1*I3 0.05*V1*I3 0.0*V3*I3 20*V3*I3 0.05*V3*I3
* V1 applied when VN set to dervied. * V3 applied when VN set to measured
RESTRICTED E/F
3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
21 22 23 24 25 26
(Sub Heading) Courier Number (Percentage) Courier Number (Percentage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) 41530 41531 41532 41533 41534 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 20 150 0.2 1 0.2 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0.05*I1 0.1*I1 0.05*I3 20 150 1.0*I1 1.5*I1 1.0*I3 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01*I1 0.01*I3 2 2 2 2 2
IREF> k1 IREF> k2 IREF> Is1 IREF> Is2 IREF> Is
* * *
Menu Text GROUP 1 RESIDUAL O/V NVD VN Input VN>1 Function VN>1 Voltage Set
UI
Courier Col Row 3B 00
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment
3B 3B 3B
01 02 03
Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage)
G49 G23
41550 41551 41552
G49 G23 G2
Measured DT 5
0 0 1*V1 1*V3 0 0.5 0 0 1*V1 1*V3 0
1 2 50*V1 50*V3 100 100 100 1 50*V1 50*V3 100
1 1 1*V1 1*V3 0.01 0.5 0.01 1 1*V1 1*V3 0.01
2 2 2
* * *
* * *
* * * V1 applied when VN set to dervied. V3 applied when VN set to measured
VN>1 Time Delay VN>1 TMS VN>1 tReset VN>2 Status VN>2 Voltage Set
3B 3B 3B 3B 3B
04 05 06 07 08
Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) G37
41553 41554 41555 41556 41557
G2 G2 G2 G37 G2
5 1 0 Disabled 10
2 2 2 2 2
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * * V1 applied when VN set to dervied. V3 applied when VN set to measured
VN>2 Time Delay GROUP 1 100% STATOR EF 100%St EF Status 100% St EF VN3H< 100% St EF Delay 100% St EF V<Inh GROUP 1 VOLTS/HZ V/Hz Alm Status V/Hz Alarm Set V/Hz Alarm Delay V/Hz Trip Func V/Hz Trip Set
3B 3C
09 00
41558
G2
10
Setting
* *
3C 3C 3C 3C 3D
01 02 03 04 00
Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Voltage)
G37
41600 41601 41602 41603
G37 G2 G2 G2
Enabled 1 5 80
0 0.3*V3 0 30*V1
1 20*V3 100 120*V1
1 0.1*V3 0.01 1*V1
2 2 2 2 *
* * * * *
3D 3D 3D 3D 3D
01 02 03 04 05
Indexed String Courier Number (Volts/Hz) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Volts/Hz)
G37
41650 41651 41652
G37 G2 G2 G23 G2
Enabled 2.31 10 DT 2.42
0 1.5*V1 0 0 1.5*V1
1 3.5*V1 100 2 3.5*V1
1 0.01*V1 0.01 1 0.01*V1
2 2 2 2 2
* * * * *
* * * *
G23
41653 41654
Menu Text V/Hz Trip TMS V/Hz Trip Delay GROUP 1 DF/DT df/dt Status df/dt Setting df/dt Time Delay df/dt f Low df/dt f High GROUP 1 V VECTOR SHIFT V Shift Status V Shift Angle GROUP 1 DEAD MACHINE Dead Mach Status Dead Mach I> Dead Mach V< Dead Mach tPU Dead Mach tDO GROUP 1 RECONNECT DELAY Reconnect Status Reconnect Delay Reconnect tPULSE
UI
Courier Col Row 3D 3D 3E 06 07 00
Data type Courier Number (Decimal) Courier Number (Time)
Strings
Address End
Default Setting 1 1
Min 1 0
Max 63 100
Step 1 0.01
Password Level 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * *
Comment
3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3F
01 02 03 04 05 00
Indexed String Courier Number (Hz/s) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Frequency)
G37
41700 41701 41702 41703 41704
G37 G2 G2 G2 G2
Enabled 0.2 0.5 49.5 50.5
0 0.1 0 45 45
1 10 100 65 65
1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
3F 3F 40
01 02 00
Indexed String Courier Number (Angle)
G37
41750 41751
G37 G2
Enabled 10
Setting Setting
0 2
1 30
1 1
2 2
* * *
40 40 40 40 40 41
01 02 03 04 05 00
Indexed String Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
G37
41800 41801 41802 41803 41804
G37 G2 G2 G2 G2
Disabled 0.1 80 5 0.5
0 0.08*I1 10*V1 0 0
1 4*I1 120*V1 10 10
1 0.01*I1 1*V1 0.1 0.1
2 2 2 2 2 *
* * * * *
41 41 41
01 02 03
Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Time)
G37
41850 41852 41853
G37 G2 G2
Enabled 60 1
0 0 0.01
1 300 30
1 0.01 0.01
2 2 2
* * *
Menu Text GROUP 1 VOLT PROTECTION UNDER VOLTAGE V< Measurt Mode
UI
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment
42 42
01 02
(Sub Heading) Indexed String G47 41950 G47 Phase-Neutral Setting 0 1 1 2
* *
* *
* *
V< Operate Mode V<1 Function V<1 Voltage Set V<1 Time Delay V<1 TMS V<1 Poledead Inh V<2 Status V<2 Voltage Set V<2 Time Delay V<2 Poledead Inh OVERVOLTAGE V> Measurt Mode V> Operate Mode V>1 Function V>1 Voltage Set V>1 Time Delay V>1 TMS V>2 Status V>2 Voltage Set V>2 Time Delay
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Decimal) Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Time)
G48 G23
41951 41952 41953 41954 41955
G48 G23 G2 G2 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G37
Any Phase DT 50 10 1 Enabled Disabled 38 5 Enabled
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 10*V1 0 0.5 0 0 10*V1 0 0
1 2 120*V1 100 100 1 1 70*V1 100 1
1 1 1*V1 0.01 0.5 1 1 1*V1 0.01 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Phase-Neutral Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
G37 G37
41956 41957 41958 41959
G37
41960
G47 G48 G23
41961 41962 41963 41964 41965 41966
G47 G48 G23 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2
Phase-Phase Any Phase DT 130 10 1 Disabled 150 0.5
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 60*V1 0 0.5 0 60*V1 0
1 1 2 185*V1 100 100 1 185*V1 100
1 1 1 1*V1 0.01 0.5 1 1*V1 0.01
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * *
* * * *
G37
41967 41968 41969
Menu Text GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION UNDER FREQUENCY F<1 Status F<1 Setting F<1 Time Delay F<2 Status F<2 Setting F<2 Time Delay F<3 Status F<3 Setting F<3 Time Delay F<4 Status F<4 Setting F<4 Time Delay F< Function Link OVER FREQUENCY F>1 Status F>1 Setting F>1 Time Delay F>2 Status F>2 Setting F>2 Time Delay GROUP 1 RTD PROTECTION Select RTD
UI
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * *
Comment
43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 44
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
(Sub Heading) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Binary Flag (4 bits) (Sub Heading) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Frequency) Courier Number (Time) G37 G37 42013 42014 42015 42016 42017 42018 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 Enabled 50.5 2 Disabled 51 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 45 0 0 45 0 1 65 100 1 65 100 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 G65 G37 G37 G37 G37 42000 42001 42002 42003 42004 42005 42006 42007 42008 42009 42010 42011 42012 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G65 Enabled 49.5 4 Disabled 49 3 Disabled 48.5 2 Disabled 48 1 16 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 45 0 0 45 0 0 45 0 0 45 0 15 1 65 100 1 65 100 1 65 100 1 65 100 4 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 1
* 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
44
01
Binary Flags(10 bits)Indexed StringG50 42050
G50
Setting
1023
10
Menu Text RTD 1 Alarm Set RTD 1 Alarm Dly RTD 1 Trip Set RTD 1 Trip Dly RTD 2 Alarm Set RTD 2 Alarm Dly RTD 2 Trip Set RTD 2 Trip Dly RTD 3 Alarm Set RTD 3 Alarm Dly RTD 3 Trip Set RTD 3 Trip Dly RTD 4 Alarm Set RTD 4 Alarm Dly RTD 4 Trip Set RTD 4 Trip Dly RTD 5 Alarm Set RTD 5 Alarm Dly RTD 5 Trip Set RTD 5 Trip Dly RTD 6 Alarm Set RTD 6 Alarm Dly RTD 6 Trip Set RTD 6 Trip Dly RTD 7 Alarm Set RTD 7 Alarm Dly
UI
Courier Col Row 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start 42051 42052 42053 42054 42055 42056 42057 42058 42059 42060 42061 42062 42063 42064 42065 42066 42067 42068 42069 42070 42071 42072 42073 42074 42075 42076
Address End
Modbus Datagroup G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1
Default Setting 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10
Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Password Level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time)
* * * *
Menu Text RTD 7 Trip Set RTD 7 Trip Dly RTD 8 Alarm Set RTD 8 Alarm Dly RTD 8 Trip Set RTD 8 Trip Dly RTD 9 Alarm Set RTD 9 Alarm Dly RTD 9 Trip Set RTD 9 Trip Dly RTD 10 Alarm Set RTD 10 Alarm Dly RTD 10 Trip Set RTD 10 Trip Dly GROUP 1 CB FAIL & I< BREAKER FAIL CB Fail 1 Status CB Fail 1 Timer CB Fail 2 Status CB Fail 2 Timer CBF Non I Reset CBF Ext Reset UNDER CURRENT
UI
Courier Col Row 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 45 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 00
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start 42077 42078 42079 42080 42081 42082 42083 42084 42085 42086 42087 42088 42089 42090
Address End
Modbus Datagroup G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1
Default Setting 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1 80 10 85 1
Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Password Level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Time)
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A
(Sub Heading) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Indexed String Indexed String (Sub Heading) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) 42106 42107 G2 G2 0.1 0.1 Setting Setting 0.02*I1 0.02*I2 3.2*I1 3.2*I2 0.01*I1 0.01*I2 2 2 G68 G68 G37 G37 42100 42101 42102 42103 42104 42105 G37 G2 G37 G2 G68 G68 Enabled 0.2 Disabled 0.4 CB Open & I< CB Open & I< Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 10 1 10 2 2 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
I< Current Set IN< Current Set
Menu Text
UI
Courier Col Row 45 45 45 45 46 0B 0C 0D 0E 00
Data type Courier Number (Current) (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String
Strings
Modbus Start 42108
Address End
Modbus Datagroup G2
Default Setting 0.02
Cell Type Setting
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * *
Comment
ISEF< Current
BLOCKED O/C CBF Blocks I> CBF Blocks IN> GROUP 1 SUPERVISION VT SUPERVISION VTS Status VTS Reset Mode VTS Time Delay VTS I> Inhibit VTS I2> Inhibit CT SUPERVISION CTS Status CTS VN Input CTS VN< Inhibit CTS IN> Set CTS Time Delay GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3
0.001*I3 0.8*I3
0.0005*I3 2
Blocked Overcurrent Schemes
G37 G37
42109 42110
G37 G37
Disabled Disabled
Setting Setting
0 0
1 1
1 1
2 2
* * * * *
46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 4A
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 00
(Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Time) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Time) G37 G49 42155 42156 42157 42158 42159 G37 G49 G2 G2 G2 Disabled Derived 5 0.2 5 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0.5*V1 0.08*I1 0 1 1 22*V1 4*I1 10 1 1 0.5*V1 0.01*I1 1 2 2 2 2 2 G7 G69 42150 42151 42152 42153 42154 G7 G69 G2 G2 G2 Blocking Manual 5 10 0.05 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 1 0.08*I1 0.05*I1 1 1 10 32*I1 0.5*I1 1 1 0.1 0.01*I1 0.01*I1 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
4A 4A 4A
01 02 03
ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
42300 42308 42316
42307 42315 42323
G3 G3 G3
L1 Setting Group L2 Setting Group
Setting Setting
32 32 32
163 163 163
1 1 1
2 2 2
* * *
* *
* *
L3 Block IN>3&4 Setting L3 Block IN>2 L4 Block I>3&4 L4 Block I>2 Setting
* 32 163 1 2 * *
Opto Input 4
4A
04
ASCII Text (16 chars)
42324
42331
G3
* *
Opto Input 5
4A
05
42332
42339
G3
L5 Reset
Setting
32
163
Menu Text Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS Relay 1
UI
Courier Col Row 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4B 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 00
Data type ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
Strings
Modbus Start 42340 42348 42356 42364 42372 42380 42388 42396 42404 42412 42420
Address End 42347 42355 42363 42371 42379 42387 42395 42403 42411 42419 42427
Modbus Datagroup G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3
Default Setting L6 Ext Prot Trip L7 52a L8 52b L9 Not Used L10 Not Used L11 Not Used L12 Not Used L13 Not Used L14 Not Used L15 Not Used L16 Not Used
Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
Min 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Max 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Password Level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
4B
01
42450
42457
G3
R1 IN>1 Start R1 Trip CB
Setting
32
163
* * *
Relay 2
4B
02
42458
42465
G3
R2 I>1 Start Setting R2 Trip PrimeMov R3 Any Trip Setting
32
163
* * * * * *
Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6
4B 4B 4B 4B
03 04 05 06
ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
42466 42474 42482 42490
42473 42481 42489 42497
G3 G3 G3 G3
32 32 32 32
163 163 163 163
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
* * * *
* * *
R4 General Alarm Setting R5 CB Fail R6 Control Close R6 E/F Trip R7 Control Trip R7 V or F Trip R7 Volt Trip R8 Freq Trip R9 Diff Trip R10 SysBack Trip Setting Setting
* Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
Relay 7
4B
07
42498
42505
G3
* Setting Setting Setting 32 32 32 163 163 163 1 1 1 2 2 2 * * *
Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10
4B 4B 4B
08 09 0A
ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
42506 42514 42522
42513 42521 42529
G3 G3 G3
Menu Text Relay 11 Relay 12 Relay 13 Relay 14 GROUP 1 RTD LABELS RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10
UI
Courier Col Row 4B 4B 4B 4B 4C 0B 0C 0D 0E 00
Data type ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
Strings
Modbus Start 42530 42538 42546 42554
Address End 42537 42545 42553 42561
Default Setting R11 NPS Trip R12 Ffail Trip R13 Power Trip R14 V/Hz Trip
Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting
Min 32 32 32 32
Max 163 163 163 163
Step 1 1 1 1
Password Level 2 2 2 2
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * *
Comment
0927=1 AND 091F=1 AND 0006=P34????B*
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A
ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars) ASCII Text (16 chars)
42750 42758 42766 42774 42782 42790 42798 42806 42814 42822
42757 42765 42773 42781 42789 42797 42805 42813 42821 42829
G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3
RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * ** *
GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 50 00 43000 44999 * * *
GROUP 3 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 70 00 45000 46999 * * *
**
GROUP 4 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 (No Header) Select Record Faulted Phase Start Elements1 90 N/A B0 B0 B0 B0 00 00 01 02 03 Auto extraction Event Record Column Unsigned Integer (16 bits) Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String G16 G84 G16 Data Setting 0 Data * 65535 1 47000 48999 * * * * * * * * * * * * *
**
Unique cyclical fault number(from event) * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG84
Menu Text Start Elements2 Trip Elements1 Tripped Elements2 Fault Alarms Fault Time Active Group System Frequency Fault Duration CB Operate Time Relay Trip Time
UI
Courier Col Row B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E
Data type
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Default Setting
Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG107 Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG85 Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG86 Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG87 IEC870 Time & Date Unsigned Integer Courier Number (frequency) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (current)
Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
IA IA-1 IB IB-1 IC IC-1

VAB VBC VCA VAN VBN VCN
B0
0F
Data
* *
B0
10
Data
* *
B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A
Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (voltage) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (Current)
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
IA-2 IB-2 IC-2 IA Differential
* * * *
Menu Text B Differential
UI
Courier Col Row B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 26 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25
Data type Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Current) Courier Number (Watts) Courier Number (VARs)
Strings
Modbus Start
Address End
Modbus Datagroup
Default Setting
Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Min
Max
Step
Password Level
Model P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
IC Differential
VN Measured VN Derived
IN Measured IN Derived IN Sensitive IREF Diff IREF Bias I2

3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VARs 3 Phase Power Factor B0 RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10 df/dt V Vector Shift No Header)
Courier Number (No unit) 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 00 Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Temperature) Courier Number (Hz/s) Courier Number (Angle) Auto extraction Maintenance Record Column
N/A B1
Menu Text
UI
Menu Text UI
Courier Col Select Record Time and Date Record Text Record Type Record Data (No Header) Domain Sub-Domain Version Start Length Reference Transfer Mode Data Transfer (No Header) UNUSED Recorder Source (No Header) Select Record Trigger Time Format Upload 200) B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 N/A B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 N/A B3 B3 B3 N/A B4 B4 B4 B4 B4
Modbus Row 01 02 03 04 05 00 04 08 0C 10 14 18 1C 20 00 01 02 00 01 02 0A 0B Indexed String Data type UINT16 IEC Date and Time ASCII Text (32 chars) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data Transfer Indexed String Indexed String Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes) Not Used Not Used Not Used
Address Strings
Modbus Start
Default Setting End Datagroup
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Password
Model Level
Comment P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Setting Data Data Data Data
65535
G57 G90
PSL Settings Group 1 256
0 0 0
1 3 65535
1 1 1
2 2 2
* * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Only settable if Domain = PSL Settings
Unsigned Integer Indexed StringsG76 Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers Disturbance Recorder Control
G76
Setting
0 Setting
* * 0 0 Samples Data * * 0 Setting Data 1 Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting Data Default Setting Cell Type -199 199 1 0 * * * * * * * * * * Model
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Disturbance Record Extraction Unsigned Integer IEC870 Time & Date Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer 30800 30801 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G12 Modbus
Number of Disturbance Records (0 to
Oldest Stored Disturbance Record (1 to Number of Registers in Current Page Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535) Select Disturbance Record Timestamp of selected record Comment
65535) 30802 30803 40250 30930 Menu Text UI Courier Modbus 30929 30933 Address
1 Min
65535 Max
1 Step
2 Password
Col COMMS SYS DATA N/A BF Dist Record Cntrl Ref Dist Record Extract Ref Setting Transfer Reset Demand UNUSED Block Xfer Ref BF BF BF BF BF
Row 00 01 BF 03 04 05 06
Data type
Strings
Start
End
Datagroup
Level
P341 P342 P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Block Transfer Reference Reset Measurements Demand values Disturbance Record Control reference Disturbance Record Extraction Reference
Menu Cell(2) 02 Unsigned Integer None (Reset Menu Cell) Menu Cell(2)
B300
Data B400 Setting Data(but supports Reset Menu cell) Data
* * * * *
Menu Cell(2)
B200
Data
Data types and indexed string settings

TYPE G1 VALUE/BIT MASK 1 Register DESCRIPTION UNSIGNED INTEGER Range 0 to 65535
G2
1 Register
NUMERIC SETTING Value = (Setting - Minimum) / Step Size
G3
Variable number of Registers 0x00FF 0xFF00
ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS Second character First character
G4
2 Registers (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
PLANT STATUS
CB1 Open (0 = Off, 1 = On) CB1 Closed (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
G5
2 Registers (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040
CONTROL STATUS
Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)

DESCRIPTION Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
G6
1 Register 0 1 2 3 4
RECORD CONTROL COMMAND REGISTER No operation Clear Event records Clear Fault Record Clear Maintenance Records Reset Indications
G7 0 1
VTS INDICATE / BLOCK Blocking Indication
G8
1 Register 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000
LOGIC INPUT STATUS Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 2 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 3 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 4 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 5 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 6 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 7 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 8 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 10 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 11 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 12 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 13 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 14 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 15 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 16 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only

DESCRIPTION RELAY OUTPUT STATUS
TYPE G9
VALUE/BIT MASK
(Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 Relay 1 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 2 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 3 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 4 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 5 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 6 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 7 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 8 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 9 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 10 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 11 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 12 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 13 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 14 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 8 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 9 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 10 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 11 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 12 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 13 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 14 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only P343 only Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
G10
1 Register
Signed fixed point number, 1 decimal place Range -3276.8 to 3276.7
G11 0 1
YES/NO No Yes
G12
4 registers
TIME AND DATE This will take the IEC 870 format
0x007F 0x0FFF 0x9FBF 0xFFFF G13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
First register - Years Second register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week Third Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes Fourth Register - Milli-seconds EVENT RECORD TYPE (MODBUS) Latched alarm active Latched alarm inactive Self reset alarm active Self reset alarm inactive Relay event Opto event Protection event Platform event Fault logged event Maintenance record logged event
G14 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4
I> FUNCTION LINK I>1 VTS Block I>2 VTS Block I>3 VTS Block I>4 VTS Block Not Used
(Note: 1=Block, 0=Non Directional) P341 only P341 only P341 only P341 only

DESCRIPTION Not Used Not Used Not Used DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
G15 0 1 2 G16 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 G17 0 1 2 3 G18 0 1 2 3 4 5
No Record Unextracted Extracted FAULTED PHASE Start A Start B Start C Start N Trip A Trip B Trip C Trip N IRIG-B STATUS Card not fitted Card failed Signal healthy No signal RECORD SELECTION COMMAND REGISTER No Operation Select next event Accept Event Select next Disurbance Record Accept disturbance record Select Next Disturbance record page
G19 0 1 2 3 G20 (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000, 0x00FF 0x0000, 0xFF00 0x00FF, 0x0000 0xFF00, 0x0000
LANGUAGE English Francais Deutsch Espanol PASSWORD (2 REGISTERS) First password character Second password character Third password character Fourth password character NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL ALWAYS INDICATE AN * IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE THE PASSWORD SECURITY.
G21 0 1 G22 0 1 2
IEC870 INTERFACE RS485 Fibre Optic PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2. Level 1 - Password required for level 2. Level 2 - No passwords required.

DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE AND V/HZ CURVE SELECTION
TYPE G23
VALUE/BIT MASK
0 1 2
Disabled DT IDMT
G24
2 Registers
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Example 123456.789 stored as 123456789
G25
1 Register
UNSIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES Example 50.050 stored as 50050 Range -32.768 to 32.767
G26 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000
RELAY STATUS Event Disturbance Alarm Trip Out of Service Plant Control Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused
G27
2 REGISTERS
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Range -2.147E9 to 2.147E9
G28
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE POWER & WATT-HOURS Power = (Secondary power/CT secondary) * (100/VT secondary) Range -32768 to 32767
G29
3 REGISTER
POWER MULTIPLER All power measurments use a signed value of type G28 and a 2 register unsigned long multiplier of type G27 Value = Real Value*110/(CTsecondary*VTsecondary) For Primary Power Multipler = CTprimary * VTprimary/110 For Secondary Power Multipler = CTsecondary * VTsecondary/110 Range -1.40E14 to 1.40E14
G30
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES Range -327.68 to 327.67

DESCRIPTION ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR P341 P342 VAN VBN VCN VN IA IB IC IN IN Sensitive P343 VAN VBN VCN VN IA-1 IB-1 IC-1 IN IN Sensitive IA-2 IB-2 IC-2
TYPE G31
VALUE/BIT MASK
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
VAN VBN VCN VN IA IB IC IN Sensitive
G32
DIGITAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR (See DDB) P341 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Unused R1 IN>1 Start R2 I>1 Start R3 Any Trip R4 General Alarm R5 CB Fail R6 Control Close R7 Control Trip L1 Setting group L2 Setting group L3 Block IN>3&4 L4 Block I> 3&4 L5 Reset L6 Ext Prot Trip L7 52a L8 52b LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 SG-opto Invalid Protn Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail P342 Unused R1 Trip CB R2 Trip PrimeMov R3 Any Trip R4 General Alarm R5 CB Fail R6 E/F trip R7 V or F Trip L1 Setting Group L2 Setting Group L3 Block IN>2 L4 Block I>2 L5 Reset L6 Ext Prot Trip L7 52a L8 52b LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 SG-opto Invalid Protn Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail P343 Unused R1 Trip CB R2 Trip PrimeMov R3 Any Trip R4 General Alarm R5 CB Fail R6 E/F Trip R7 Volt Trip R8 Freq Trip R9 Diff Trip R10 SysBack Trip R11 NPS Trip R12 Ffail Trip R13 Power trip R14 V/Hz trip L1 Setting Group L2 Setting Group L3 Block IN>2 L4 Block I>2 L5 Reset L6 Ext Prot Trip L7 52a L8 52b L9 Not Used L10 Not Used L11 Not Used L12 Not Used L13 Not Used L14 Not Used L15 Not Used L16 Not Used LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7

DESCRIPTION Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of range Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 User Alarm 4 df/dt Trip V Shift Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C I>3 Trip Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy NPS Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 User Alarm 4 Field Fail1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Trip Sys Back Trip Sys Back Trip A Sys Back Trip B Sys Back Trip C V/Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip Any RTD Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB LED 8 SG-opto Invalid Protn Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy NPS Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 User Alarm 4 100% ST EF Trip DeadMachine trip Gen Diff Trip Gen Diff Trip A Gen Diff Trip B Gen Diff Trip C Field Fail1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Trip Sys Back Trip Sys Back Trip A Sys Back Trip B Sys Back Trip C V/Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92

DESCRIPTION I>3 Trip A I>3 Trip B I>3 Trip C I>4 Trip I>4 Trip A I>4 Trip B I>4 Trip C Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C I>3 Start I>3 Start A I>3 Start B I>3 Start C I>4 Start I>4 Start A I>4 Start B I>4 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start ISEF>1 Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start Any RTD Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147

DESCRIPTION F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph Control Trip Control Close Close in Prog Reconnection I> BlockStart IN/SEF>Blk Start df/dt Start IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start Lockout Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Field Volts Fail F>2 Start VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start IN< Start V/Hz Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start Sys Back Start Sys Back Start A Sys Back Start B Sys Back Start C RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Lockout Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Field Volts Fail V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start ISEF>1 Start 100% ST EF Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start IN< Start V/Hz Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start Sys Back Start Sys Back Start A Sys Back Start B Sys Back Start C RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Lockout Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Field Volts Fail
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201

DESCRIPTION TRIGGER MODE
TYPE G34
VALUE/BIT MASK
0 1
Single Extended
G35
Numeric Setting (as G2 but 2 registers) Number of steps from minimum value expressed as 2 register 32 bit unsigned int
G37 0 1
ENABLED / DISABLED Disabled Enabled
G38 0 1 2
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s
G39 0 1 2
COMMUNICATIONS PARITY Odd Even None
G43 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IDMT CURVE TYPE Disabled DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse
G44 0 1 2
DIRECTION Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev
G46 0 1
POLARISATION Zero Sequence Neg Sequence
G47 0 1
MEASURING MODE Phase-Phase Phase-Neutral
G48 0 1
OPERATION MODE Any Phase Three Phase
G49 0 1
VN OR IN INPUT Measured Derived

DESCRIPTION RTD SELECT
TYPE G50
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200
RTD Input 1 RTD Input 2 RTD Input 3 RTD Input 4 RTD Input 5 RTD Input 6 RTD Input 7 RTD Input 8 RTD Input 9 RTD Input 10
G52 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DEFAULT DISPLAY 3Ph + N Current 3Ph Voltage Power Date and Time Description Plant Reference Frequency Access Level
G53 0 1 2 3 4 5
SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4
G54 0 1
SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS Primary Secondary
G55 0 1 2
CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL No Operation Trip Close
G56 0 1 2 3 4 5
PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE VA VB VC IA IB IC
G57 0 1
Data Transfer Domain PSL Settings PSL Configuration
G58 0 1 2
SEF/REF SELECTION SEF Wattmetric Hi Z REF

DESCRIPTION Lo Z REF Lo Z REF+SEF Lo Z REF+Wattmet P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 3 4 5
G59 0 1
BATTERY STATUS Dead Healthy
G60 0 1
Time Delay Selection DT Inverse
G61 0 1
ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL Select via Menu Select via Opto
G62 0 1 2
SAVE AS No Operation Save Abort
G63 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
IN> FUNCTION LINK IN>1 VTS Block IN>2 VTS Block IN>3 VTS Block IN>4 VTS Block Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
(Note: 1=Block, 0=Non Directional) P341 only P341 only P341 only P341 only
ISEF> FUNCTION LINK ISEF>1 VTS Block ISEF>2 VTS Block ISEF>3 VTS Block ISEF>4 VTS Block Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
(Note: 1=Block, 0=Non Directional)
P341 only P341 only P341 only
F< FUNCTION LINK F<1 Poledead Blk F<2 Poledead Blk F<3 Poledead Blk F<4 Poledead Blk Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
G66 0 1 2
MESSAGE FORMAT No Trigger Trigger L/H Trigger H/L

DESCRIPTION CB Fail Reset Options
TYPE G68
VALUE/BIT MASK
0 1 2
I< Only CB Open & I< Prot Reset & I<
G69 0 1
VTS RESET MODE Manual Auto
G71 0 1 2
PROTOCOL Courier IEC870-5-103 Modbus
G76 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TRANSFER MODE Prepare Rx Complete Rx Prepare Tx Complete Tx Rx Prepared Tx Prepared OK Error
G79 0 1 2
CUSTOM SETTINGS Disabled Basic Complete
G80 0 1
VISIBLE / INVISIBLE Invisible Visible
G81 0 1 G84 Modbus value+bit position (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000
RESET LOCKOUT BY User Interface CB Close START ELEMENTS 1
General Start Start Power1 Start Power2 Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start Sys Back Start I>1 Start I>2 Start I>3 Start I>4 Start IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 P341 only P341 only P341 only P341 only P341 only P341 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only

DESCRIPTION Start ISEF>4 Start NVD VN>1 Start NVD VN>2 Start 100% ST EF P343 only P341 only
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
G85
Modbus value+bit position (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
TRIP ELEMENTS 1
Any Trip Trip Gen Diff Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip FFail1 Trip FFail2 Trip NPS Trip Sys Back Trip I>1 Trip I>2 Trip I>3 Trip I>4 Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip IREF> Trip NVD VN>1 Trip NVD VN>2 Trip 100% ST EF Trip Dead Mach P343 only P343 only P431 only P431 only P431 only P431 only P431 only P431 only P431 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P343 only
G86
Bit Description (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002
TRIP ELEMENTS 2
Trip V<1 Trip V<2

DESCRIPTION Trip V< A/AB Trip V< B/BC Trip V< C/CA Trip V>1 Trip V>2 Trip V> A/AB Trip V> B/BC Trip V> C/CA Trip F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip V/Hz Trip df/dt Trip V Shift Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 P342 and P343 only P341 only P341 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
G87
Bit Description (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000
FAULT ALARMS
CB Fail 1 CB Fail 2 VTS CTS Alarm FFail Alarm NPS Alarm V/Hz Alarm RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only

DESCRIPTION
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
G88 0 1
ALARMS Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled
G90 0 1 2 3
GROUP SELECTION Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
G93 0 1 2
COMMISSION TEST No Operation Apply Test Remove Test
G94 0 1
COMMISSION TEST No Operation Apply Test
SYSTEM FUNCTION LINKS Trip led self reset (1 = enable self reset) Not Used Not Used Not used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
G96
Bit Position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
ALARM INDEXED STRINGS Battery Fail Field Volt Fail SG-opto Invalid Protn Disabled VT Fail Alarm CTS Fail Alarm CB Fail I^ Maint Alarm I^ Maint Lockout CB OPs Maint CB OPs Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock

DESCRIPTION CB Status Alarm CB Trip Fail CB Close Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of Range NPS Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 User Alarm 4 P341 only P341 only P341 only P341 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only P342 and P343 only
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
G98 0 1 2 3 4
COPY TO No Operation Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
G99 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CB CONTROL Disabled Local Remote Local+Remote Opto Opto+local Opto+Remote Opto+Rem+local
G101 0 1 2
GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION SELECT Disabled Percentage Bias High Impedance
G102 0 1 2 3
POWER FUNCTION SELECT Disabled Reverse Low Forward Over
G103 0 1 2 3
SYSTEM BACKUP FUNCTION SELECT Disabled Underimpedance Volt controlled Volt restrained

DESCRIPTION SYSTEM BACKUP VECTOR ROTATION
TYPE G104
VALUE/BIT MASK
0 1
None Delta-Star
G105 0 1
DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT SELECTION Disabled DT
G107
Modbus value+bit position (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
START ELEMENTS 2
Start V<1 Start V<2 Start V< A/AB Start V< B/BC Start V< C/CA Start V>1 Start V>2 Start V> A/AB Start V> B/BC Start V> C/CA Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start V/Hz Start df/dt P342 and P343 only P341 only
G108
Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RTD OPEN CIRCUIT FLAGS RTD 1 label RTD 2 label RTD 3 label RTD 4 label RTD 5 label RTD 6 label RTD 7 label RTD 8 label RTD 9 label RTD 10 label

DESCRIPTION RTD SHORT CIRCUIT FLAGS RTD 1 label RTD 2 label RTD 3 label RTD 4 label RTD 5 label RTD 6 label RTD 7 label RTD 8 label RTD 9 label RTD 10 label
TYPE G109
VALUE/BIT MASK Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
G110
Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RTD DATA ERROR RTD 1 label RTD 2 label RTD 3 label RTD 4 label RTD 5 label RTD 6 label RTD 7 label RTD 8 label RTD 9 label RTD 10 label
G111 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
IDMT CURVE TYPE DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse
G118 0 1 2
CB CONTROL LOGIC INPUT ASSIGNMENTS None 52A 52B
EVENT RECORD DATA FORMAT

Event Text 16 Chars Logic Inputs Additional Event Description Text Change in Opto Input Modbus Event Type G13 5 Courier Cell Ref 0020 P341 Value Binary Flag (8 bits) Binary Flag (16 bits) * * * P342 P343
Value contains new opto input status Output Contacts Change in output contact status 4 0021 Binary Flag (7 bits) Binary Flag (14 bits) Value contains new output contact status Alarm Events: Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Bit 31 Direction 1=ON, 0 = OFF Battery Fail Field Volt Fail SG-opto Invalid Protn Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of range NPS Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 User Alarm 4 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Battery Fail Field Voltage Fail Setting Group via opto invalid Protection Disabled VTS Alarm CTS Alarm CB Trip Fail Protection Broken Current Maintenance Alarm Broken Current Lockout Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm CB Op Time Lockout Alarm Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm CB Failed to Trip CB Failed to Close No Healthy Control Close Frequency out of range Negative Phase Sequence Alarm Volts Per Hz Alarm Field failure Alarm (Latched) RTD thermal Alarm (Latched) RTD open circuit failure (Latched) RTD short circuit failure (Latched) RTD data inconsistency error (Latched) RTD Board failure (Latched) User definable frequency protection alarm (Latched) User definable voltage protection alarm (Latched) User Definable Alarm 1 (Latched) User Definable Alarm 2 (Latched) User Definable Alarm 3 (Self Reset) User Definable Alarm 4 (Self Reset) Protection Events: Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Bit 31 Direction 1=ON, 0 = OFF 100% ST EF Trip DeadMachine trip Gen Diff Trip Gen Diff Trip A Gen Diff Trip B Gen Diff Trip C Field Fail1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Trip Sys Back Trip Sys Back Trip A ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip Dead machine protection Trip Generator Differential trip 3ph Generator Differential Trip A Generator Differential Trip B Generator Differential Trip C Field failure Stage 1 start Field failure Stage 2 start Negative Phase Sequence Trip System Backup Trip 3ph System Backup Trip A 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 0/1 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 2/3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 2/3 2/3 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0023 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 0022 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Modbus Event Type G13 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Courier Cell Ref 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 P341 Value 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 P343
Event Text 16 Chars Sys Back Trip B Sys Back Trip C V/Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip df/dt Trip Any RTD Trip V Shift Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C
Additional Event Description Text ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF System Backup Trip B System Backup Trip C Volts per Hz Trip RTD 1 TRIP RTD 2 TRIP RTD 3 TRIP RTD 4 TRIP RTD 5 TRIP RTD 6 TRIP RTD 7 TRIP RTD 8 TRIP RTD 9 TRIP RTD 10 TRIP Rate of change of frequency Trip Any RTD Trip Voltage vector shift trip 1st Stage EF Trip 2nd Stage EF Trip 3rd Stage EF Trip 4th Stage EF Trip REF Trip 1st Stage SEF Trip 2nd Stage SEF Trip 3rd Stage SEF Trip 4th Stage SEF Trip 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA Under frequency Stage 1 trip Under frequency Stage 2 trip Under frequency Stage 3 trip Under frequency Stage 4 trip Over frequency Stage 1 Trip Over frequency Stage 2 Trip Power stage 1 trip Power stage 2 trip 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 1st Stage O/C Trip A 1st Stage O/C Trip B 1st Stage O/C Trip C

Modbus Event Type G13 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Courier Cell Ref 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 P341 Value 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 P343
Event Text 16 Chars I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C I>3 Trip I>3 Trip A I>3 Trip B I>3 Trip C I>4 Trip I>4 Trip A I>4 Trip B I>4 Trip C Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C I>3 Start I>3 Start A I>3 Start B I>3 Start C I>4 Start I>4 Start A I>4 Start B I>4 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start
Additional Event Description Text ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 4th Stage O/C Trip A 4th Stage O/C Trip B 4th Stage O/C Trip C Any Start 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA Power Stage 1 start Power stage 1 start 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 1st Stage O/C Start A 1st Stage O/C Start B 1st Stage O/C Start C 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Start A 2nd Stage O/C Start B 2nd Stage O/C Start C 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Start A 3rd Stage O/C Start B 3rd Stage O/C Start C 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 4th Stage O/C Start A 4th Stage O/C Start B 4th Stage O/C Start C 1st Stage EF#1 Start 2nd Stage EF#1 Start 3rd Stage EF#1 Start 4th Stage EF#1 Start 1st Stage SEF Start 2nd Stage SEF Start

Modbus Event Type G13 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Courier Cell Ref 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 P341 Value 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 310 311 312 313 314 318 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 342 343 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 FFFF 0B01 0B02 0B03 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0805 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 P343
Event Text 16 Chars ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start 100% ST EF Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph Control Trip Control Close Close in Prog df/dt Start V/Hz Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start Sys Back Start Sys Back Start A Sys Back Start B Sys Back Start C RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph
Additional Event Description Text ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 3rd Stage SEF Start 4th Stage SEF Start 100% Stator Earth Fault Start Under frequency Stage 1 START Under frequency Stage 2 START Under frequency Stage 3 START Under frequency Stage 4 START Over frequency Stage 1 START Over frequency Stage 2 START tBF1 Trip 3Ph tBF2 Trip 3Ph Control Trip Control Close Control Close in Progress Rate of change of frequency Start Volts per Hz Start Field failure Stage 1 start Field failure Stage 2 start System Backup Start 3Ph System Backup Start A System Backup Start B System Backup Start C RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm 3 ph CB Open 3 ph CB Closed General Events
Alarms Cleared Events Cleared Faults Cleared Maint Cleared PW Unlocked UI PW Invalid UI PW1 Modified UI PW2 Modified UI PW Expired UI PW Unlocked F PW Invalid F PW1 Modified F PW2 Modified F PW Expired F PW Unlocked R PW Invalid R PW1 Modified R PW2 Modified R PW Expired R IRIG-B Active
Relay Alarms Cleared Relay Event Records Cleared Relay Fault Records Cleared Relay Maintenance Records Cleared Control and Support Settings Changed Disturbance Recorder Settings Changed Change to Protection Setting Group 1 Change to Protection Setting Group 2 Change to Protection Setting Group 3 Change to Protection Setting Group 4 Active Group Selection Changed Password Unlocked via User Interface Invalid Password entered on User Interface Password unlock expired User Interface Password Unlocked via Front Port Invalid Password entered on Front Port Password unlock expired Front Port Password Unlocked via Rear Port Invalid Password entered on Rear Port Password unlock expired Rear Port

Modbus Event Type G13 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Courier Cell Ref 0805 0801 FFFF 0904 0904 0904 0904 0904 0903 01FF FFFF P341 Value 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 P343
Event Text 16 Chars IRIG-B Inactive Time Synch C&S Changed Dist Changed Group 1 Changed Group 2 Changed Group 3 Changed Group 4 Changed Act Grp Changed Indication Reset Power On
Additional Event Description Text Password Level 1 Modified on User Interface Password Level 1 Modified on Front Port Password Level 1 Modified on User Interface Password Level 2 Modified on User Interface Password Level 2 Modified on Front Port Password Level 2 Modified on User Interface IRIG-B Timesync Active (Valid Signal) IRIG-B Timesync Inactive (No Signal) Relay Clock Adjusted Relay Indications Reset Relay Powered Up
Cell Ref Fault Recorded Text Maint Recorded Fault Records: Self Monitoring: Maintenance Records 9 8 0100 Cell Ref FFFF
Value 0 Value 0
Extraction Column B000 Extraction Column B100
Record Number 16bit UINT Record Number 16bit UINT
Maintenance Record Text: Fast WDog Error Battery Failure BBRAM Failure Field Volt Fail Bus Reset Error Slow WDog Error SRAM Failure Bus SRAM Failure Blk FLASH Failure Code Verify Fail EEPROM Failure Software Failure Hard Verify Fail Non Standard
Description Fast Watchdog Error Battery Failure Battery Back RAM Failure Field Voltage Failure Bus Error Slow Watchdog Error SRAM Bus Failure SRAM Block Failure Flash checksum Error Software Code Verification Failure EEPROM Failure Software Error Hardware Verification Error General Error
Continuous * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Compatability Level 2
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
Physical Layer Electrical Interface: EIA RS-485 Number of loads 1 for one protection equipment
Optical Interface (Order option) Plastic Fibre BFOC/2.5 type connector
Transmission speed User Setting: 9600 or 19200
Application Layer More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU
Standard information numbers in monitor direction
ASDU TYP
COT
FUN INF
Description
GI
Model Number P341 P342 P343
Address
Interpretation
System Functions(Monitor) 8 6 5 5 5 5 10 8 3 4 5 6 255 0 255 0 224 2 224 3 224 4 224 5 End of General Interrogration Time Syncronisation Reset FCB Reset CU Start/Restart Power On 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note 1: Indenfication message in ASDU 5: ALSTOM, Software ref P34x. Note 2: The Function type is a settable quantity.
Status Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 9,11 9,11 9,11 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 16 17 18 224 19 20 224 21 22 224 23 224 24 224 25 224 26 224 27 224 28 224 29 224 30 224 27 224 28 224 29 224 30 224 27 224 28 224 29 224 30 224 27 224 28 224 29 224 30 Auto-recloser active Tele-protection active Protection active LED Reset Monitor direction blocked Test mode Local parameter setting Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Characteristic 3 Characteristic 4 Auxillary input 1 Auxillary input 2 Auxillary input 3 Auxillary input 4 Auxillary input 1 Auxillary input 2 Auxillary input 3 Auxillary input 4 Auxillary input 1 Auxillary input 2 Auxillary input 3 Auxillary input 4 Auxillary input 1 Auxillary input 2 Auxillary input 3 Auxillary input 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 Group 1 Active Group 2 Active Group 3 Active Group 4 Active Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 0 Protection Disabled 0 Reset Indication

GI Model Number P341 P342 P343 Address Interpretation
ASDU TYP
COT
FUN INF
Description
Supervision Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 32 33 35 36 37 224 38 39 46 47 Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision V Phase sequence supervision Trip circuit supervision I>> back-up supervision VT fuse failure Teleprotection disturbed Group warning Group alarm 0 VT Supervision Indication
Earth Fault Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 48 49 50 51 52 Earth Fault L1 Earth Fault L2 Earth Fault L3 Earth Fault Fwd Earth Fault Rev
Fault Indications
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7
224 64 224 65 224 66 224 64 224 65 224 66 224 64 224 65 224 66 224 64 224 65 224 66 224 64 224 65 224 66 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 67 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68
Start /pickup L1 Start /pickup L2 Start /pickup L3 Start /pickup L1 Start /pickup L2 Start /pickup L3 Start /pickup L1 Start /pickup L2 Start /pickup L3 Start /pickup L1 Start /pickup L2 Start /pickup L3 Start /pickup L1 Start /pickup L2 Start /pickup L3 Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N Start /pickup N General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip

0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
I>1 A Phase Start I>1 B Phase Start I>1 C Phase Start I>2 A Phase Start I>2 B Phase Start I>2 C Phase Start I>3 A Phase Start I>3 B Phase Start I>3 C Phase Start I>4 A Phase Start I>4 B Phase Start I>4 C Phase Start Ssytem Backup A Phase Start Ssytem Backup B Phase Start Ssytem Backup C Phase Start IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start 100% Stator Earth fault Start Any Trip System Backup trip V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V>1 Trip V>2 Trip F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip

4 4 4 0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7

8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


GI Model Number P341 P342 P343 Address 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 Interpretation F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power 1 Trip Power 2 Trip Field Failure 1 Trip Field Failure 2 Trip V/Hz Trip df/dt Trip Voltage Vector Shift Trip NPS Trip Restrictive Earth Fault Trip 100% Sator Earth Fault Trip Generator Differential Trip Dead Machine Trip Any RTD Trip I>1 Phase A Trip I>1 Phase B Trip I>1 Phase C Trip I>2 Phase A Trip I>2 Phase B Trip I>2 Phase C Trip I>3 Phase A Trip I>3 Phase B Trip I>3 Phase C Trip I>4 Phase A Trip I>4 Phase B Trip I>4 Phase C Trip System Backup Phase A Trip SysBack Phase B Trip SysBack Phase C Trip
ASDU TYP 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
COT 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9
FUN INF 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 68 224 69 224 70 224 71 224 69 224 70 224 71 224 69 224 70 224 71 224 69 224 70 224 71 224 69 224 70 224 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84
Description General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip General Trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip I>> (back up) Fault Location in ohms Fault forward Fault reverse Teleprotection signal sent Teleprotection signal received Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Any Start System Backup Start V<1 Start V<2 Start V>1 Start V>2 Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start


GI Model Number P341 P342 P343 Address 12 13 14 15 16 17 0 Interpretation Power 1 start Power 2 Start Field Failure 1 Start Field Failure 2 Start V/Hz Start df/dt Start CB Fail Alarm
ASDU TYP 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
COT 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7
FUN INF 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 84 224 85 86 87 88 89 224 90 224 90 224 91 224 91 224 91 224 92 224 92 224 92 224 92 224 92 224 93 224 93 224 93 224 93 224 93 224 93 224 93
Description General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start General Start Breaker Failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system E Trip I> Trip I> Trip I>> Trip I>> Trip I>> Trip IN> Trip IN> Trip IN> Trip IN> Trip IN> Trip IN>> Trip IN>> Trip IN>> Trip IN>> Trip IN>> Trip IN>> Trip IN>>

0 1 0
I>1 trip I>2 Trip I>3 Trip I>2 Trip I>4 Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip VN>1 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>4 Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip VN>2 Trip

0 1
0 1 2 3
4 0
0 1
1 2 3
Auto-Reclose Indications (Monitor) 1 1 1 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 128 CB on by A/R 129 CB on by long time A/R 130 AR blocked
Measurands (Monitor) 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 9 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,7 144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I,V 146 Measurands I,V,P,Q 147 Measurands IN,VEN 224 148 Measurands IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f 0
Generic Functions(Monitor) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 42,43 42,43 42,43 1,2,7,9,11,12,42,43 10 41,44 40,41 40 240 Read Headings 241 Read attributes of all entries of a group 243 Read directory of entry 244 Real attribute of entry 245 End of GGI 249 Write entry with confirm 250 Write entry with execute 251 Write entry aborted
Standard Information numbers in control direction ASDU TYP COT FUN INF Description GI Model Number P341 P342 P343 Address Interpretation
System Functions (Control) 7 6 9 8 224 0 Init General Interrogation Time Syncronisation 0 255
General Commands 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 16 17 18 224 19 224 23 224 24 224 25 224 26 Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off LED Reset Activate characteristic 1 Activate characteristic 2 Activate characteristic 3 Activate characteristic 4 0 0 0 0 0 Reset Indications and latches Group 1 Active Group 2 Active Group 3 Active Group 4 Active
Generic Functions 21 21 21 21 21 10 10 10 10 42 42 42 42 9 40 40 40 40 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read single attribute of all entries of a group 243 Read directory of single entry 244 Read attribute of sngle entry 245 Generic General Interrogation (GGI) 248 Write entry 249 Write with confirm 250 Write with execute 251 Write entry abort
* Note the value in this column is added to the station address to produce the common address of the ASDU
Basic Application Functions Test Mode Blocking of monitor direction Disturbance data Generic services Private data
Miscellaneous Max .MVAL = times rated value Measurand Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 Voltage L1-E Voltage L2-E Voltage L3-E Active Power P Reactive Power Q Frequency f Voltage L1-L2 1.2 2.4

English Text Output Label 1 (Setting) Output Label 2 (Setting) Output Label 3 (Setting) Output Label 4 (Setting) Output Label 5 (Setting) Output Label 6 (Setting) Output Label 7 (Setting) Output Label 8 (Setting) Output Label 9 (Setting) Output Label 10 (Setting) Output Label 11 (Setting) Output Label 12 (Setting) Output Label 13 (Setting) Output Label 14 (Setting) P341 * * * * * * * P342 * * * * * * * P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No Source 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Opto Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition
Description Output Relay 1 Output Relay 2 Output Relay 3 Output Relay 4 Output Relay 5 Output Relay 6 Output Relay 7 Output Relay 8 Output Relay 9 Output Relay 10 Output Relay 11 Output Relay 12 Output Relay 13 Output Relay 14 Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused
Opto Label 1 (setting) Opto Label 2 (setting) Opto Label 3 (setting) Opto Label 4 (setting) Opto Label 5 (setting) Opto Label 6 (setting) Opto Label 7 (setting) Opto Label 8 (setting) Opto Label 9 (setting) Opto Label 10 (setting) Opto Label 11 (setting) Opto Label 12 (setting) Opto Label 13 (setting) Opto Label 14 (setting) Opto Label 15 (setting) Opto Label 16 (setting)
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

English Text P341 P342 P343
DDB No Source 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition Output Condition PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer
Description Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Programmable LED 1 Programmable LED 2 Programmable LED 3 Programmable LED 4 Programmable LED 5 Programmable LED 6 Programmable LED 7 Programmable LED 8 Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to Relay Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to LED Output Condition Input to Auxiliary Timer 1 Input to Auxiliary Timer 2 Input to Auxiliary Timer 3 Input to Auxiliary Timer 4 Input to Auxiliary Timer 5 Input to Auxiliary Timer 6 Input to Auxiliary Timer 7 Input to Auxiliary Timer 8 Output from Auxiliary Timer 1 Output from Auxiliary Timer 2 Output from Auxiliary Timer 3 Output from Auxiliary Timer 4 Output from Auxiliary Timer 5 Output from Auxiliary Timer 6 Output from Auxiliary Timer 7 Output from Auxiliary Timer 8
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Relay 13 Relay 14 LED Cond IN 1 LED Cond IN 2 LED Cond IN 3 LED Cond IN 4 LED Cond IN 5 LED Cond IN 6 LED Cond IN 7 LED Cond IN 8 Timer in 1 Timer in 2 Timer in 3 Timer in 4 Timer in 5 Timer in 6 Timer in 7 Timer in 8 Timer out 1 Timer out 2 Timer out 3 Timer out 4 Timer out 5 Timer out 6 Timer out 7 Timer out 8
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

English Text Fault_REC_TRIG SG-opto Invalid Protn Disabled VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock Fault Freq Lock CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy F out of range NPS Alarm V/Hz Alarm Field Fail Alarm RTD Thermal Alm RTD Open Cct RTD short Cct RTD Data Error RTD Board Fail Freq Prot Alm Voltage Prot Alm User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 User Alarm 4 SysBack Timer Bk I>1 Timer Block I>2 Timer Block I>3 Timer Block I>4 Timer Block IN>1 Timer Block IN>2 Timer Block IN>3 Timer Block IN>4 Timer Block ISEF>1 Timer Blk ISEF>2 Timer Blk ISEF>3 Timer Blk ISEF>4 Timer Blk Trip CB Close CB VN>1 Timer Blk VN>2 Timer Blk V<1 Timer Block V<2 Timer Block V>1 Timer Block V>2 Timer Block F<1 Timer Block F<2 Timer Block * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P341 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No Source 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 PSL Group Selection Commission Test VT Supervision CT Supervision Breaker Fail CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Monitoring CB Status CB Control CB Control CB Control Frequency Tracking NPS Thermal Overfluxing Field Failure RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL
Description Trigger for Fault Recorder Setting Group via opto invalid Alarm Test Mode Enabled Alarm VTS Indication CTS Indication Breaker Fail Any Trip Broken Current Maintenance Alarm Broken Current Lockout Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout Excessive CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm Excessive CB Op Time Lockout Alarm Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB auxilliary contacts) CB Failed to Trip Alarm CB Failed to Close Alarm CB Unhealthy on Control Close Alarm Frequency out of range Negative Phase Sequence Alarm Volts Per Hz Alarm Field failure Alarm RTD thermal Alarm RTD open circuit failure RTD short circuit failure RTD data inconsistency error RTD Board failure Frequency protection alarm Voltage protection alarm User settable alarm 1 User settable alarm 2 User settable alarm 3 User settable alarm 4 Block System Backup Time Delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 3 time delay Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 4 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 2 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 3 time delay Block Earth Fault Stage 4 time delay Block SEF Stage 1 time delay Block SEF Stage 2 time delay Block SEF Stage 3 time delay Block SEF Stage 4 time delay Logic Input Trip CB Logic Input Close CB Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 time delay Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 4 time delay Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer Block Underfrequency Stage 2 Timer

English Text F<3 Timer Block F<4 Timer Block F>1 Timer Block F>2 Timer Block External Trip 3ph CB Aux 3ph(52-A) CB Aux 3ph(52-B) CB Healthy MCB/VTS Reset Close Dly Reset LEDs Reset Lockout reset All Values Reset I2 Thermal 100% ST EF Trip DeadMachine trip Gen Diff Trip Gen Diff Trip A Gen Diff Trip B Gen Diff Trip C Field Fail1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Trip Sys Back Trip Sys Back Trip A Sys Back Trip B Sys Back Trip C V/Hz Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip df/dt Trip Any RTD Trip V Shift Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip IREF> Trip ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V<1 Trip B/BC * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P341 * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No Source 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL 100% Stator Earth Fault Dead Machine Generator Differential Generator Differential Generator Differential Generator Differential Field Failure Field Failure NPS Thermal System Backup System Backup System Backup System Backup Overfluxing RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal df/ft RTD Thermal Voltage Vector Shift Earth Fault Earth Fault Earth Fault Earth Fault Restricted Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Neutral Displacement Neutral Displacement Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage
Description Block Underfrequency Stage 3 Timer Block Underfrequency Stage 4 Timer Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer External Trip 3ph 52-A (3 phase) 52-B (3 phase) CB Healthy MCB/VTS opto Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay Reset Latched Relays & LEDs Reset Lockout Opto Input Reset CB Maintenance Values Reset NPS Thermal State 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip Dead machine protection Trip Generator Differential trip 3ph Generator Differential Trip A Generator Differential Trip B Generator Differential Trip C Field failure Stage 1 start Field failure Stage 2 start Negative Phase Sequence Trip System Backup Trip 3ph System Backup Trip A System Backup Trip B System Backup Trip C Volts per Hz Trip RTD 1 TRIP RTD 2 TRIP RTD 3 TRIP RTD 4 TRIP RTD 5 TRIP RTD 6 TRIP RTD 7 TRIP RTD 8 TRIP RTD 9 TRIP RTD 10 TRIP Rate of change of frequency Trip Any RTD Trip Voltage vector shift trip 1st Stage EF Trip 2nd Stage EF Trip 3rd Stage EF Trip 4th Stage EF Trip REF Trip 1st Stage SEF Trip 2nd Stage SEF Trip 3rd Stage SEF Trip 4th Stage SEF Trip 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC

English Text V<1 Trip C/CA V<2 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB V<2 Trip B/BC V<2 Trip C/CA V>1 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Trip C/CA V>2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB V>2 Trip B/BC V>2 Trip C/CA F<1 Trip F<2 Trip F<3 Trip F<4 Trip F>1 Trip F>2 Trip Power1 Trip Power2 Trip I>1 Trip I>1 Trip A I>1 Trip B I>1 Trip C I>2 Trip I>2 Trip A I>2 Trip B I>2 Trip C I>3 Trip I>3 Trip A I>3 Trip B I>3 Trip C I>4 Trip I>4 Trip A I>4 Trip B I>4 Trip C Any Start VN>1 Start VN>2 Start V<1 Start V<1 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA V<2 Start V<2 Start A/AB V<2 Start B/BC V<2 Start C/CA V>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB V>1 Start B/BC V>1 Start C/CA V>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB V>2 Start B/BC P341 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No Source 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Under Frequency Under Frequency Under Frequency Under Frequency Over Frequency Over Frequency Power Power Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current All protection Neutral displacement Neutral displacement Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Under Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage Over Voltage
Description 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA Under frequency Stage 1 trip Under frequency Stage 2 trip Under frequency Stage 3 trip Under frequency Stage 4 trip Over frequency Stage 1 Trip Over frequency Stage 2 Trip Power stage 1 trip Power stage 2 trip 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 1st Stage O/C Trip A 1st Stage O/C Trip B 1st Stage O/C Trip C 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 4th Stage O/C Trip A 4th Stage O/C Trip B 4th Stage O/C Trip C Any Start 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC

English Text V>2 Start C/CA Power1 Start Power2 Start I>1 Start I>1 Start A I>1 Start B I>1 Start C I>2 Start I>2 Start A I>2 Start B I>2 Start C I>3 Start I>3 Start A I>3 Start B I>3 Start C I>4 Start I>4 Start A I>4 Start B I>4 Start C IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start 100% ST EF Start F<1 Start F<2 Start F<3 Start F<4 Start F>1 Start F>2 Start VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block Bfail1 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph Control Trip Control Close Close in Prog Reconnection I> BlockStart * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P341 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 * * * * * * * * * * * P343 * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No Source 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 Over Voltage Power Power Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Over Current Earth Fault Earth Fault Earth Fault Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitive Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Under Frequency Under Frequency Under Frequency Under Frequency Over Frequency Over Frequency VT Supervision VT Supervision CT Supervision Breaker failure Breaker failure CB Control CB Control CB Control Reconnection Over Current
Description 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA Power Stage 1 start Power stage 1 start 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 1st Stage O/C Start A 1st Stage O/C Start B 1st Stage O/C Start C 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 2nd Stage O/C Start A 2nd Stage O/C Start B 2nd Stage O/C Start C 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 3rd Stage O/C Start A 3rd Stage O/C Start B 3rd Stage O/C Start C 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 4th Stage O/C Start A 4th Stage O/C Start B 4th Stage O/C Start C 1st Stage EF Start 2nd Stage EF Start 3rd Stage EF Start 4th Stage EF Start 1st Stage SEF Start 2nd Stage SEF Start 3rd Stage SEF Start 4th Stage SEF Start 100% Stator Earth Fault Start Under frequency Stage 1 START Under frequency Stage 2 START Under frequency Stage 3 START Under frequency Stage 4 START Over frequency Stage 1 START Over frequency Stage 2 START VTS Fast Block VTS Slow Block CTS Block tBF1 Trip 3Ph tBF2 Trip 3Ph Control Trip Control Close Control Close in Progress Reconnection Time Delay Output I> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail
Over Current 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 df/dt Under Current Under Current Under Current Under Current Under Current Overfluxing Field Failure Field Failure System Backup
IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail IN/SEF>Blk Start Rate of change of frequency Start IA< operate IB< operate IC< operate ISEF< operate IN< operate Volts per Hz Start Field failure Stage 1 start Field failure Stage 2 start System Backup Start 3Ph df/dt Start IA< Start IB< Start IC< Start ISEF< Start IN< Start V/Hz Start FFail1 Start FFail2 Start Sys Back Start

English Text Sys Back Start A Sys Back Start B Sys Back Start C RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Lockout Alarm CB Open 3 ph CB Closed 3 ph Field Volts Fail (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) (Hidden from PSL) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P341 P342 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No Source 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 System Backup System Backup System Backup RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal RTD Thermal CB Monitoring CB Status Monitor CB Status Monitor Field Voltage Monitor Poledead Poledead Poledead Poledead Poledead VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision VT Supervision CB Failure CB Failure CB Failure CB Failure Frequency tracking Frequency tracking Frequency tracking Frequency tracking Reconnection Reconnection Reconnection Reconnection
Description System Backup Start A System Backup Start B System Backup Start C RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm Composite lockout alarm 3 ph CB Open 3 ph CB Closed Field Voltage Failure All Poles Dead Any Pole Dead Phase A Pole Dead Phase B Pole Dead Phase C Pole Dead Accelerate Ind Any Voltage Dependent Ia over threshold Ib over threshold Ic over threshold Va over threshold Vb over threshold Vc over threshold I2 over threshold V2 over threshold Superimposed Ia over threshold Superimposed Ib over threshold Superimposed Ic over threshold CBF current prot SEF stage trip CBF non current prot stage trip CBF current Prot SEF Trip CBF Non Current Prot Trip Freq High Freq Low Freq Not found Stop Freq Track Reconnect LOM (unqualified) Reconnect Disable (unqualified) Reconnect LOM Reconnect Disable Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

English Text P341 P342 P343
DDB No Source 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL
Description Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused PSL Internal Node 1 PSL Internal Node 2 PSL Internal Node 3 PSL Internal Node 4 PSL Internal Node 5 PSL Internal Node 6 PSL Internal Node 7 PSL Internal Node 8 PSL Internal Node 9 PSL Internal Node 10 PSL Internal Node 11 PSL Internal Node 12 PSL Internal Node 13 PSL Internal Node 14 PSL Internal Node 15 PSL Internal Node 16 PSL Internal Node 17 PSL Internal Node 18 PSL Internal Node 19 PSL Internal Node 20 PSL Internal Node 21 PSL Internal Node 22 PSL Internal Node 23 PSL Internal Node 24 PSL Internal Node 25 PSL Internal Node 26
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

English Text P341 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No Source 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL
Description PSL Internal Node 27 PSL Internal Node 28 PSL Internal Node 29 PSL Internal Node 30 PSL Internal Node 31 PSL Internal Node 32 PSL Internal Node 33 PSL Internal Node 34 PSL Internal Node 35 PSL Internal Node 36 PSL Internal Node 37 PSL Internal Node 38 PSL Internal Node 39 PSL Internal Node 40 PSL Internal Node 41 PSL Internal Node 42 PSL Internal Node 43 PSL Internal Node 44 PSL Internal Node 45 PSL Internal Node 46 PSL Internal Node 47 PSL Internal Node 48 PSL Internal Node 49 PSL Internal Node 50 PSL Internal Node 51 PSL Internal Node 52 PSL Internal Node 53 PSL Internal Node 54 PSL Internal Node 55 PSL Internal Node 56 PSL Internal Node 57 PSL Internal Node 58 PSL Internal Node 59 PSL Internal Node 60 PSL Internal Node 61 PSL Internal Node 62 PSL Internal Node 63 PSL Internal Node 64 PSL Internal Node 65 PSL Internal Node 66 PSL Internal Node 67 PSL Internal Node 68 PSL Internal Node 69 PSL Internal Node 70 PSL Internal Node 71 PSL Internal Node 72 PSL Internal Node 73 PSL Internal Node 74 PSL Internal Node 75 PSL Internal Node 76 PSL Internal Node 77 PSL Internal Node 78 PSL Internal Node 79 PSL Internal Node 80 PSL Internal Node 81

English Text P341 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P342 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P343 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB No Source 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL
Description PSL Internal Node 82 PSL Internal Node 83 PSL Internal Node 84 PSL Internal Node 85 PSL Internal Node 86 PSL Internal Node 87 PSL Internal Node 88 PSL Internal Node 89 PSL Internal Node 90 PSL Internal Node 91 PSL Internal Node 92 PSL Internal Node 93 PSL Internal Node 94 PSL Internal Node 95 PSL Internal Node 96 PSL Internal Node 97 PSL Internal Node 98 PSL Internal Node 99 PSL Internal Node 100
Appendix B External Connection Diagrams
TG8614A Volume 1 Appendix B Page 1 of 2
Figure 1:
External connection diagram. Generator protection relay for (40TE) small generator
TG8614A Volume 1 Appendix B Page 2 of 2
Figure 2:
External connection diagram. Generator protection relay with (60TE) differential 100% stator E/F and dead machine

Tg8614a P342, P343 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tg8614a P342, P343 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Guide Types MiCOM P342, P343 Generator Protection Relays

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Contents

Technical Guide Type MiCOM 342, 343 Generator Protection Relays

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to product documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal

Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Decommissioning and Disposal

Product safety: 73/23/EEC

Technical Guide Types MiCOM P342, P343 Generator Protection Relays

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Contents Page 1 of 1 1 2 4 4 4 5 6 8 9 9 9 9 10 11 12 12 12 13 13 14 16 16 18 20 4 6 8 11 14 15 17

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 1 of 21

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 2 of 21

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 3 of 21

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 4 of 21

Section 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

Fixed function LEDs

ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER

User programmable function LEDs

Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port

Figure 1: Relay front view

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 5 of 21

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 6 of 21

Optional IRIG-B board

Digital input connections

Power supply connection

Rear comms port (RS485)

Current* and voltage input terminals

Digital output (relays) connections

Figure 2: Relay rear view

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 7 of 21

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 8 of 21

Column data settings

Control & support

Group 1 Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4

Figure 3: Menu structure

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 9 of 21

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 10 of 21

Access Level Level 0 No password required Level 1 Password 1 or 2 required

Level 2 Password 2 required

TECHNICAL GUIDE MiCOM P342, P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

TG8614A Volume 1 Chapter 1 Page 11 of 21